JP2019115386A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably stopping an operation of a movable body for performance.SOLUTION: A first movable body determines that, if contact to the first movable body is detected, abnormality has occurred, and a second movable body determines that, abnormality has occurred, if a rotary operation is not detected. The first movable body 99 stops an operation at a time point when occurrence of abnormality is detected once, and the second movable body stops an operation at a time point when occurrence of abnormality is detected twice. By different determination methods for determining abnormality, according to kinds of movable bodies, abnormality determination according to a shape or operation of the movable body can be performed, and control for stopping an operation preferably, is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine which stops the movable body for presentation when contact of a human body is detected during operation of the movable body for presentation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-99627, A

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, stop control corresponding to the type of effect movable body has not been considered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably stopping the operation of the effect movable body.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first effect movable body (for example, a first movable body 99AK001L, a first movable body 99AK001R) provided so that the player can make contact with the player;
A second effect movable body (for example, a second movable body 99AK002) provided so that the player can make contact with the player;
And an operation control unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, drive unit 99AK011, drive unit 99AK021) for controlling the operation of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body.
The operation control means is
It is possible to execute control for stopping the operation during operation of the first effect movable body (for example, the processing of step 99AKS004 can be performed),
It is possible to execute control for stopping the operation during operation of the second effect movable body (for example, the processing of step 99AKS017 can be performed),
The operation is stopped under different conditions for the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 perform different determinations).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The first effect movable body is operable to change the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the first movable body 99AK001 projects outward as shown in FIG. 8-10),
The second effect movable body may be operable without changing the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the second movable body 99AK002 rotates).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It comprises abnormality determination means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means is
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body based on the determination result by the abnormality determination unit (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be performed).
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body based on the determination result by the abnormality determination unit (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 may be performed).
Control is performed so that the time from when it is determined that there is an abnormality to when the movable body for the second effect is abnormal before the movable body for the first effect is determined is longer (for example, the contact is detected in step 99AKS003) When it is done, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped immediately, and the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped when the second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
It comprises abnormality determination means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means is
The first effect movable body stops its operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality the first number of times (for example, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 is stopped when one touch is detected in step 99AKS003),
The second effect movable body stops operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality a second number of times which is more than the first number of times (for example, when a second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015) The operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
It comprises abnormality determination means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The abnormality determination means determines that the first effect movable body is abnormal when the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS003, it is determined that the contact is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014 as abnormal). ), It is determined that the second effect movable body is abnormal when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS013 when the rotation detector 99AK023 does not detect the rotation operation, the operation abnormality) May be determined to have occurred.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015);
A detection unit (for example, a touch sensor 99AK014) that detects a player's touch;
The abnormality determination unit determines the presence or absence of an abnormality in the first effect movable body based on the detection result by the detection unit (for example, in step 99AKS003, when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects a touch, it is determined that the abnormality is detected. It may be determined.
According to such a configuration, the effect movable body can be operated safely.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are each operable between an origin position and a post-operation position,
The operation control means is
After executing control to stop the operation during operation with the first effect movable body, it is possible to execute control to move the first effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS007 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS008 is executed),
After executing control to stop the operation during operation with the second effect movable body, it is possible to execute control to move the second effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, for example) If it is determined in step 99AKS021 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS022 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
Movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the home position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member And CPU for effect control that executes command processing at power-on of the AKS 012),
The movable control unit may perform control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS 007) when the change permission state is set.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is performed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
And at least a movable control unit capable of executing control of return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position (for example, CPU 120 for effect control for executing command processing at the time of power on of step AKS012);
The movable control means is
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010);
When in the change permission state, control to execute the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not performed when the change permission state is in effect, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the air volume set with respect to the sound volume which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output amount setting process which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation which concerns on the characteristic part 98AK. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine which concerns on characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the 1st movable body which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the function structure of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a figure which shows the operation timing and the operation | movement content of a movable body which concern on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable body abnormality determination processing which concerns on the characteristic part 99AK. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which concern on another characteristic part. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine concerning the other feature part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production control command which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random value used as the random number for games which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on another feature part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit classification determination table which concerns on another feature part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification which concerns on another feature part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning and display content of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the storage area which memorize | stores the number of prize balls which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on another feature part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the example of control of the display in the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the buffer update which concerns on another feature part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which concerns on another feature part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a rear perspective view showing a pachinko game machine in a modification according to another feature. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which open | released the frame for game machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another feature part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another feature part. It is a figure which shows the example of state control which concerns on another feature part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the priority of production control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount selector switch which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initialization setting control which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of alerting | reporting which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning a characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching processing at the time which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ongoing output change process which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of presentation control in the modification concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the initial operation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation in the modification which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation alerting | reporting screen which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the presentation control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning a characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation production control processing which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation production control process during setting change which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also referred to as special figures) as plural types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is being held, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  A predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area is provided such that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. In the open state, of an elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period in which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an open upper limit period. A cycle in which the special winning opening is thus opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute repeatedly until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary to have a "small hit" as a display result of the special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display in execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature 98AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 98AK of the present embodiment will be described. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 98AK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 98AK, the first air blowing port 98AK001 is provided at the lower position (back side portion of the stick controller 31A) of the gaming machine frame 3 and the second blowing at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3 A mouth 98AK002 is provided. A wind can be output toward the player from the first air blowing port 98AK001 and the second air blowing port 98AK002, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 8-2, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 98AK, the first blower 98AK011 for outputting the wind from the first air outlet 98AK001 and the wind for outputting the air from the second air outlet 98AK002. A second fan 98AK012 is provided. The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are connected to the effect control board 12 and perform blowing with a predetermined air volume based on a control signal from the effect control board 12.

  The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are respectively configured by a motor, a fan, and the like, and can generate a wind having a predetermined air volume in accordance with a control signal from the effect control board 12. The wind generated by the first fan 98AK011 is output from the first air outlet 98AK001, and the wind generated by the second fan 98AK012 is output from the second air outlet 98AK002. The first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012 are not limited to those constituted by a motor, a fan or the like, and at least one may blow air using a pump or compressed air (cylinder). A wind may be generated along with sound or vibration. For example, wind (vibration) may be generated when sound is output by a bass reflex speaker or a uffer.

  In this embodiment, wind is output from the first air blowing port 98AK001 and / or the second air blowing port 98AK002 in a predetermined case such as during execution of a specific effect such as reach effect. In this embodiment, the player can set the sound volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in four stages by performing a predetermined operation. The air volume of the wind output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is variable, and as shown in FIG. 8-3, four air volumes are provided. The second blower 98AK012 changes the amount of rotation of the motor (fan) to change the volume of the wind output from the second air outlet 98AK002.

  In this embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the air volume of the wind output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is set to an air volume that is inversely proportional to the set volume. That is, the larger the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the smaller the volume of the output wind, and the smaller the volume output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the larger the volume of the output wind. ing. In this way, the voice can be complemented by the wind, the wind can be complemented by the voice, and it is possible to balance the respective output amounts. The number of steps of the volume and the air volume is not limited to four, and may be three or less or five or more. Further, the air volume (the correspondence between the volume and the air volume) set by the volume is not limited to the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the output amount setting process performed by the effect control CPU 120. The output amount setting process is a process for monitoring the presence or absence of the volume change operation by the player and setting the volume corresponding to the operation content and setting the air volume corresponding to the volume when the volume change operation is performed. . The output amount setting process may be performed for each timer interrupt, for example, in the effect control process process (after step S161, etc.). That is, the output amount setting process may be executed so that the presence or absence of the volume setting operation by the player can always be monitored.

  In the output amount setting process shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a volume change operation has been performed (step 98AKS001). The volume change operation may be any operation, but for example, the volume may be increased or decreased by operating the stick controller 31A to the left or right except during effects using the stick controller 31A. The menu screen may be called to set the volume by performing a predetermined operation on the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B or the like. If the volume change operation has not been performed (step 98AKS001; No), the output amount setting process is ended.

  If the volume change operation has been performed (Step 98 AKS 001; Yes), the volume after change is set (Step 98 AKS 002). In step 98AKS002, for example, the volume after change may be stored (set) in a volume storage area provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 for storing the currently set volume. When sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the volume storage area is referred to and control is performed so that the sound is output at the set volume.

  Subsequently, the air volume corresponding to the changed volume is set (step 98AKS003). In step 98AKS003, for example, the air volume corresponding to the changed volume may be stored (set) in the air volume storage area for storing the currently set air volume provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002, the air volume storage area is referred to and control is performed so that the wind is output with the set air volume.

  Thereafter, in order to allow the player to confirm the volume after the change, a predetermined change confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume after the change (step 98AKS004). At the same time, in order to allow the player to confirm the air volume after the change, the wind is output with the air volume after the change from the second air outlet 98AK002 (step 98AKS005). Then, the output amount setting process is ended. In step 98AKS005, the wind may be output with the air volume after the change from the first air blowing port 98AK001.

  The output of the change confirmation sound may be omitted when another sound (such as an effect sound) is output, or may be output superimposed on another sound.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic unit 98AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation of the characteristic portion 98AK will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIGS. 8-5 is an example of production | presentation operation | movement in case the reach production | presentation of super reach is performed and it becomes a big hit. FIG. 8-5 (A) shows that the decorative symbol indicating the numeral of 7 is stopped in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 and it is in the reach mode. ing.

  After that, when developing into a super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), an image indicating that the image is a super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative design is displayed by being reduced in the upper left portion . At this time, a sound of "super reach" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 toward the player. It is notified that it became super reach by such an effect. At this time, the output of the sound and the output of the wind do not have to be simultaneous. For example, the wind may be output a predetermined time after the sound is output, for example, one second. By doing this, since the wind is output after being notified that it has become a super reach by voice, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising. In the example shown in FIG. 8-5, the volume and the air volume are not shown, but in the reach effect of the super reach shown in FIG. 8-5, for example, the air volume corresponding to the set volume (air volume 1 when set volume 1, When the set volume is 4, the wind may be output at an air volume of 4 or the like.

  Thereafter, when the reach effect of the super reach (for example, battle effect in which the characters face each other) is executed and the timing for deriving and displaying the variable display approaches, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the stick controller 31A is simulated. The word "match!" Indicating that the effect image 98AK031 and the battle effect are finalized is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), a effect image 98AK031U simulating the stick controller 31A. Is enlarged, and the characters "close!" Are displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice "close" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this manner, an operation promotion effect that urges the operation of the stick controller 31A is performed.

  Here, when an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (E), a decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 is aligned, and a character image indicating that the battle effect is won is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the wind is output from the first air outlet 98AK001 to the player. Since the first air blowing port 98AK001 is provided on the back side of the stick controller 31A, the wind output from the first air blowing port 98AK001 strikes the hand of the player who operated the stick controller 31A. As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the display on the image display device 5, the wind is output to the player to notify that the game has become a big hit. As described above, at the end timing of the reach effect, the effect of notifying the variable display result is determined, which is also referred to as effect (suggested effect suggesting control in an advantageous state). In addition, the air volume of the wind output from 1st ventilation opening 98AK001 becomes constant (for example, air volume 4) irrespective of setting. The air volume of the wind output from the first air outlet 98AK001 may also be changed according to the set volume.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 is displayed large, and the variable display result of the big hit is derived and displayed. And, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

  In addition, in the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 8-5, the case of the final big hit is shown, but in the case of the final loss, the decorative symbol of the combination of the missing at the stage of FIG. 8-5 (E) Is displayed, and a character image showing that the game is defeated in the battle effect is displayed. In this case, the wind is not output from the first air outlet 98AK001. In addition, after the operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is executed, when the stick controller 31A is not operated, the result of the battle effect is informed as time passes, and the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the result of the battle effect is notified by the passage of time, the wind may not be output from the first air blowing port 98AK001 even if it becomes a big hit.

  Subsequently, another rendering operation example of the characteristic portion 98AK will be described. FIG. 8-6 is an example of a rendering operation in the case where the reach effect of the horror system super reach is executed and the volume is changed during the reach effect. When a horror-system super reach reach effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the characters “Horror reach!” Are displayed on the image display 5, and the decorative pattern is reduced to the upper left portion. Is displayed. At this time, a voice of “horror reach” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 toward the player. Here, it is assumed that the volume is set to 4, which is the maximum value, and the air volume is set to 1. Therefore, the voice "horror reach" is output at the maximum volume.

  For example, when it is a player who is not good at horror system effects, etc., when it is not preferred that reach effects of “horror reach” are executed at the maximum volume, an operation of lowering the volume by operating the stick controller 31A. can do. For example, when the volume is reduced from 4 to 1, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (B) and (C), the display indicating the volume on the image display device 5 changes from 4 to 1, and the speakers 8L and 8R. While the voice (BGM etc.) of the reach production of "horror reach" is output with the volume 1 after change, a wind is output by the wind volume 4 from 2nd ventilation opening 98AK002.

  By doing this, it is possible to secure the reduction of the rendering effect due to the reduction of the volume by raising the wind output amount, and it is possible to prevent the reduction of the extreme rendering effect. In addition, although the volume is lowered, the output amount of the wind rises contrary to that, it is possible to execute a surprising effect. In addition to the output of the effect sound (such as BGM) of the reach effect in FIG. 8-6 (C), the change confirmation sound may be output.

  FIG. 8-7 shows an example of the effect operation when the volume change operation is performed during the demonstration effect. FIG. 8-7 (A) shows that the predetermined demonstration effect is performed in the image display device 5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), during the demonstration effect, no sound is output and no wind is output regardless of the set volume and air volume. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the voice and the wind from being outputted during the demonstration effect and to be bothersome, and to increase the power consumption. During the demonstration effect, the volume and the air volume may be set to predetermined values (for example, low values) regardless of the set volume and air volume.

  At this time, when the set volume is 4 and the operation to reduce the volume from 4 to 1 is performed, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C), a display indicating the volume in the image display device 5 is displayed. 4 to 1 and the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound "PIN" as the change confirmation sound at the volume 1 after the change, and the second air outlet 98AK 002 has a volume of the air at the volume 4 after the change. It is output.

  As described above, even during the silent and quiet demonstration, when the volume change operation is performed, the change confirmation sound is output at the volume 1 after the change, and the air volume after the change is the air volume 4 The wind is output. Thus, the player or the like before the start of the game can grasp the volume and air volume after the change.

(Modified example according to the characteristic portion 98AK)
In this embodiment, an arbitrary volume can be set by the volume change operation of the player or the like, but the volume is determined in advance by the effect contents, and a specific effect (for example, reach effect or advance effect) is executed. Alternatively, the wind may be output at an air volume corresponding to the volume in the specific effect (for example, an air volume inversely proportional to the volume).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the air volume of the wind output from the second air outlet 98AK002 is set to the air volume that is inversely proportional to the set volume, but is limited thereto Alternatively, different air volumes may be set according to the set volume, and may be set to, for example, a volume proportional to the set volume. By doing this, for example, when the volume is changed, the wind is output with an air volume proportional to the volume after the change, so it becomes easy to grasp the volume after the change.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first air outlet 98AK001 and the second air outlet 98AK002 are provided as air outlets capable of outputting wind, but a single air outlet may be provided, and three abnormal locations are provided. It may be done. In this case, the air volume of the wind output from at least a part of the blower ports may be made different depending on the volume to be output. The installation position of the blower may also be arbitrary.

  Also, in addition to or in place of setting the air volume according to the set volume, the period from the sound output to the wind output may be different from the period during which the wind is output. .

  In this embodiment, the volume can be changed even while the game is in progress, but it is possible to change the volume by calling up the menu screen when a game such as during demonstration is not being performed. It is also good. Further, by calling such a menu screen, the presence or absence of the wind output and the output frequency may be changed. The presence or absence of wind output and the output frequency may be changed while the game is in progress.

  In addition, when the operation of changing the sound volume is performed while the wind is being output, the air volume may be changed after a predetermined period has elapsed. For example, after the volume change operation is performed, the setting of the air volume may be changed at the timing of ending the sound output being output or the timing of ending the wind output.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the wind is output from the second air outlet 98AK002 toward the player at the timing of notification of reaching the super reach (notification of the reach title). The The wind may be output from the second air outlet 98AK002 only at the time of notification of the reach title, or the wind may be output in accordance with BGM and sound effects during the subsequent reach effect. In addition, the wind may not be output from the second air outlet 98AK002 or the air volume may be reduced in a predetermined period (for example, immediately before the finalization effect) during the reach effect.

  When a volume change operation is performed, the air volume may be changed after a predetermined period of time, instead of immediately changing the air volume. For example, the time until the air volume is changed may be different between when the volume is increased and when it is decreased. After the volume change operation is performed, if the volume is further changed during a predetermined period (for example, volume 1 → 2 → 3 etc.), the air volume corresponding to the further changed volume (eg air volume 4 → 2 etc) Should be set.

  In addition, by providing a lamp inside or in the vicinity of the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002 and making the point at the time of the output of the wind, an effect of notifying that the air is being output is performed. May be Further, the effect of notifying that the wind is being output may be executed by the image display device 5 or the existing game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  In the initial operation when the power is turned on, the wind may be output from the first air blowing port 98AK001 and the second air blowing port 98AK002 to check the operation of the wind output. In this case, the wind may be output from the first air blowing port 98AK001 and the second air blowing port 98AK002 at a constant air flow rate (for example, 4 which is the maximum value) regardless of the set air flow rate.

  Also, when an error is notified, wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 and / or the second air outlet 98AK002. In this case, the wind may be output from the first air blowing port 98AK001 and / or the second air blowing port 98AK002 at a constant air flow rate (for example, 4 which is the maximum value) regardless of the set air flow rate. Further, the air outlet for outputting the wind may be different depending on the type of error.

  A configuration for enabling control of an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player based on the set value, and for changing the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation, and a set value set A configuration may be provided to make it possible to confirm by the display. In this case, when the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the change operation of the volume or the air volume may be prohibited or restricted. When an operation to change the setting value is being performed, if the operation to change the volume is performed, the predetermined volume and volume (for example, maximum value to silence nothing) are not changed without changing the set volume or volume. Voice and wind may be output. At this time, a warning sound may be output indicating that the change of the volume is limited. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

(Description of means related to the feature portion 98AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the feature portion 98AK is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Volume control means capable of setting the volume of at least a specific effect (e.g. reach effect) to a plurality of levels of volume including the first volume and the second volume larger than the first volume (e.g. effect control to execute the processing of step 98AKS002 CPU for CPU 120),
It is possible to output wind with different air volumes when the specific effect is performed at the first volume and when the specific effect is performed at the second volume (for example, the air volume corresponding to the volume in the process of step 98 AKS 003) CPU for effect control 120 to set, Figure 8-3).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
It is equipped with a blower (for example, the first blower 98AK011 and the second blower 98AK012) capable of outputting wind.
The air blowing unit can output wind with different air volumes when the specific effect is performed at the first volume and when the specific effect is performed at the second volume (for example, FIG. 8-3). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The wind can be output with a smaller air volume when the specific effect is performed at the second volume than when the specific effect is performed at the first volume (for example, FIG. 8-3). It is also good.
According to such a configuration, the volume setting can be performed without interrupting the progress of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The volume setting unit may set the volume to any one of a plurality of levels while the game is in progress (for example, FIG. 8-5).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Suggested effect executing means (for example, effects shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) to (E) for executing the effects shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) to (E)) for performing the suggested effects (for example, determined effects) suggesting control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player CPU for CPU 120),
When the suggested effect is executed, the wind may be output with a predetermined air volume (for example, the air volume 4) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting unit.
According to such a configuration, unexpected effects can be performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Equipped with operation means (for example, stick controller 31A) operable by the player;
When the player operates the operation means, the wind may be output to the player (for example, the wind may be output from the first air outlet 98AK001 at the time of the effect to operate the stick controller 31A).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is enhanced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
A demonstration effect execution unit capable of executing a demonstration effect when the game is not in progress (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that executes a demonstration effect as shown in FIG. 8-7);
The volume setting unit can set the volume to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, silent) when the demonstration effect is performed,
When the setting of the volume is performed while the demonstration effect is being performed, the wind is output in a different output mode according to the set volume (for example, FIG. 8-7 (C)).
The wind output mode is common (for example, no wind) regardless of the volume set by the volume setting unit except when the demonstration effect is performed and the volume setting is performed. It is also good.
According to such a configuration, since the air volume changes in accordance with the change in the volume, it becomes easy to grasp the setting condition of the volume.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Playable, controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means along with the start of the power supply;
Detecting means for effect adjustment (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of effect;
Output amount control means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the ongoing output change process at step 71AKS019) which controls the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means. Such as the CPU 120 for effect control to be executed),
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means when in the change permission state (for example, as command processing at power on of step 71AKS012 of step AKS012 And the like) and the like.
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is limited when in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the setting value changing operation.

(Description of feature 99AK)
Next, the feature part 99AK of the present embodiment will be described. 8-8 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 99AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 99AK is provided with a first movable body 99AK001L, 99AK001R and a second movable body 99AK002 as movable bodies that operate according to an effect.

  The first movable body 99AK001L is provided at the upper left position of the gaming machine frame 3, and the first movable body 99AK001R is provided at the upper right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The first movable body 99AK001L and the first movable body 99AK001R are collectively referred to as a first movable body 99AK001. The first movable body 99AK001 is provided to be able to perform a projecting (advancing) operation toward the outside (the left and right diagonally upward direction) of the gaming machine frame 3. Thus, the first movable body 99AK001 is operable to change the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 99AK, the speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the left and right lower positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

  The second movable body 99AK002 is provided at the left position of the gaming machine frame 3. The second movable body AK 002 is provided to be able to perform a rotational motion clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the player. As described above, the second movable body 99AK002 can operate without changing the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Note that the operation modes of the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are not limited to this, and any arbitrary operation may be possible.

  As shown in FIG. 8-8, since the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can make contact. The player may not always be in contact, and the player may be in contact either in the sitting state or in the standing state. In addition, contact may be made at a predetermined timing during a game (for example, only when the first movable body 99AK001 protrudes).

  As shown in FIG. 8-9, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 are connected to the effect control board 12, and operate based on the control signal from the effect control board 12.

  Next, an operation example of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 (A) shows the case where the first movable body 99AK001 is at the home position (position before operation), and in FIG. 8-10 (B) the first movable body 99 AK 001 is in the advanced position (half projection) The case where the first movable body 99AK001 is in the post-operation position (the position where it is maximally projected) is shown in FIGS. 8-10C.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) to (C), in the first movable body 99AK001, the rod-shaped part 99AK010 constituting the first movable body 99AK001 is outside the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It is projected to move forward.

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), when the first movable body 99AK001 is at the home position (position before operation), the rod-like role 99AK010 is completely housed in the gaming machine frame 3; Become.

  The rod-shaped combination 99AK010 of the first movable body 99AK001, as shown in FIG. As shown in 2.), the projection operation is performed toward the upper left direction and the upper right direction when viewed from the front side. When operating to the post-operation position, it protrudes to the post-operation position as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C). When the projecting operation condition is ended with the end of the reach effect, the rod-shaped object 99AK010 is stored in the limited position shown in FIG. 8-10 (A).

  For example, the rod-shaped product 99AK010 projects outward in accordance with the forward rotation of the motor provided in the first movable body 99AK001 and the forward rotation of the drive gear. In addition, the rod-shaped role 99AK010 is accommodated toward the inside of the gaming machine frame 3 according to the reverse rotation of the motor and the reverse rotation of the drive gear.

  A light emitting member may be provided in each of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R, and light emission may be configured according to the projecting operation or the like. Further, the projecting operation of each of the rod-shaped character objects 99AK010 of the first movable bodies 99AK001L and 99AK001R is outside the game frame 30 toward the upper left diagonal direction and the upper right diagonal direction viewed from the front side as described above. The projecting operation is not limited to the above, and any projecting operation may be performed as long as it projects outside the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1), and it is on the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be projected in the direction, the forward direction, or the lateral direction.

  8-11 (A) is a figure which shows a function structure of 1st movable body 99AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the first movable body 99AK001 is composed of a rod-shaped object 99AK010, a drive unit 99AK011, an origin position detector 99AK012, an after-operation position detector 99AK013, and a touch sensor 99AK014.

  The rod-like character 99AK010 is a rod-like member (a character) that performs the projecting operation as shown in FIG. 8-10 in the first movable body 99AK001.

  The drive unit 99AK011 is configured by a motor, a drive gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a storage operation for ending the protrusion operation and the protrusion of the rod-shaped product 99AK010. The drive unit 99AK011 drives the rod-shaped object 99AK010 based on the control signal from the effect control board 12, and executes the protrusion operation or the storage operation.

  The origin position detector 99AK012 is configured of a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, or a button) capable of detecting that the rod-shaped object 99AK010 is at the origin position (a state in which the rod-shaped object 99AK010 is completely accommodated). Ru.

  Post-operation position detector 99AK013, a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, pressure-sensitive sensor) capable of detecting that the rod-shaped object 99AK010 is in the post-operation position (position where rod-shaped object 99AK010 fully projects, position where projection operation is completed) , Buttons).

  The touch sensor 99AK014 is a sensor (for example, a capacitive touch sensor or a pressure sensor) capable of detecting that the player has made contact with the rod-shaped object 99AK010, and is provided, for example, at the tip or side of the rod-shaped object 99AK010. Be The origin position detector 99AK012, the post-operation position detector 99AK013, and the touch sensor 99AK014 can transmit the detection result to the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, the contact type touch sensor 99AK014 detects that the player has touched the rod-shaped object 99AK010, but a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor detects the rod-shaped role. It may be detected or estimated that the player has touched the object 99AK010.

  In this embodiment, when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects the contact with the first movable body 99AK001 (the rod-like object 99AK010) during the operation of the first movable body 99AK001, the safety is secured or the first movable body 99AK001 is damaged or In order to prevent the failure, the operation is stopped.

  8-11 (B) is a figure which shows the function structure of 2nd movable body 99AK002. As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), the second movable body 99AK002 is configured of a circular combination object 99AK020, a drive unit 99AK021, an origin position detector 99AK022, and a rotation detector 99AK023.

  The circular character 99AK020 is a member having a circular (hemispherical) outer shape as shown in FIG. 8-8, and is designed to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise toward the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the circular character 99AK020 has a star-shaped (five-pointed) pattern.

  The driving unit 99AK021 is configured of a motor, a driving gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a rotation operation of the circular character 99AK020. The drive unit 99AK021 drives the circular character 99AK020 based on the control signal from the effect control board 12, and executes the rotation operation.

  The origin position detector 99AK022 is a sensor that can detect that the circular character 99AK020 is at the origin position (for example, a position where one vertex of a five-pointed star drawn on the circular character 99AK020 is in the 12 o'clock direction, etc.) For example, it is comprised with a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, and a button. The circular role product 99AK020 is controlled to return to the home position (when the home position stops the rotation operation) when the rotation operation ends.

  The rotation detector 99AK022 is configured of a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensor, and a button) capable of detecting that the circular character 99AK020 is rotating. The origin position detector 99 AK 022 and the rotation detector 99 AK 022 can transmit the detection result to the effect control board 12.

  In this embodiment, it is determined that an operation error has occurred if the rotation detector 99AK022 does not detect a rotation operation while the second movable body 99AK002 is driven to rotate. Then, when the number of occurrences of operation errors reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), it is determined that the rotation operation is inhibited by the player's contact or interference, and the security of the second movable body 99AK002 In order to prevent damage or failure, the operation is stopped.

  In the second movable body 99AK002, a light emitting member may be provided so as to emit light in accordance with the rotation operation or the like. In addition, the second movable body 99AK002 is configured to perform a rotational operation, but it may be operable as long as it can operate, and may project as in the case of the first movable body 99AK001. The vibrator may move or move without changing the outer shape of the lens.

  8-12 (A) is a figure which shows the operation timing and operation | movement content of 1st movable body 99AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), in this embodiment, the first movable body 99AK 001 operates when it determines the effect of notifying the variable display result (big hit) at the end timing of the reach effect, and executes the effect, It projects to the rear position and is then stored at the home position. In addition, at the time of execution of the super reach of high expectation degree among the super reach, the projecting operation is performed to the advanced position, and then stored at the origin position.

  8-12 (B) is a figure which shows the operation timing and operation | movement content of 2nd movable body 99AK002. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), in this embodiment, the second movable body 99AK 002 rotates in advance as a preliminary notice when the gaming ball is won in the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It is supposed to run. And, the big hit reliability differs according to the rotational speed. In the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), the jackpot reliability increases in the order of prefetch notice C> prefetch notice B> prefetch notice A, and the higher the jackpot reliability, the faster the rotation speed. In addition to the rotation operation of the second movable body 99AK002, a hold notice may be executed to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display as the pre-reading notice.

  8-12, for example, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 may operate at the time of performing another effect. The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 may operate at the same time.

  In addition, the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 execute an initial operation when the power is turned on. The initial operation (operation at power on) includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of effects accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal rendering operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal rendering operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 to the original position.

  FIGS. 8-13 is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable body abnormality determination processing which CPU120 for production control performs. The movable body abnormality determination process is a process for determining whether or not there is an operation abnormality of the movable body while the movable body is operating, and performing control to stop the operation of the movable body when it is determined that there is an operation abnormality. is there. The output amount setting process may be performed for each timer interrupt, for example, in the effect control process process (after step S161, etc.). That is, the movable body abnormality determination process may be performed so that the operation abnormality of the movable body can be determined in a period in which the operation of the movable body can be performed.

  In the movable body abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the first movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS001). The first movable body error flag is set on when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001. That is, in step S99AKS001, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is occurring in the first movable body 99AK001.

  If the first movable body error flag is off (step 99AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation (step 99AKS002). Whether or not the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation is whether or not an effect control pattern for operating the first movable body 99AK001 is set, and whether or not effect control based on the effect control pattern is being executed. It may be determined by whether or not. If the first movable body 99AK001 is in any of the projecting operation, the storage operation, and the origin return operation after the abnormality determination, it may be determined that the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation.

  Note that the operation to be judged in step 99AKS002 does not include the initial operation (short initial operation, long initial operation). That is, in step 99AKS002, it is determined whether the movable body 99AK001 is in operation other than the initial operation. Thus, during the initial operation, monitoring of the occurrence of an abnormality (an abnormality caused mainly by the player) in the first movable body 99AK001 can be omitted, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, occurrence of an abnormality in the first movable body 99AK001 may be monitored in at least one of the short initial operation and the long initial operation among the initial operations.

  If it is determined that the first movable body 99AK001 is in operation (step 99AKS002; Yes), it is determined whether the touch on the first movable body 99AK001 (rod-shaped object 99AK010) has been detected by the touch sensor 99AK014 ( Step 99 AKS003).

  If a touch on the first movable body 99AK001 is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014 (Step 99AKS003; Yes), control is performed to stop the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 (protrusion operation of the rod 9999) (Step 99AKS004) ). At step 99AKS004, the drive by the drive unit 99AK011 is stopped.

  Although the first movable body 99AK001 includes the first movable body 99AK001L and the first movable body 99AK001R, even when the touch is detected by the touch sensor AK014 of one of the first movable bodies 99AK001, both of them are detected. The operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped. In this way, it is possible to prevent incomplete rendering from being performed. Note that the operation of only the first movable body 99AK001 in which the contact is detected may be stopped.

  Then, a first movable body error flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001 is set to ON (step 99AK005). In addition, after stopping the operation of the first movable body 99AK001, set (start) a timer for measuring the return operation standby time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the standby time until returning to the home position (Step 99AKS006) And the movable body abnormality determination processing is ended.

  If the contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is further detected in step 99AKS003 during the recovery operation after the abnormality determination, for example, the operation does not operate the first movable body 99AK001 until the initial operation at the time of power on again succeeds. It may be stopped. When the first movable body 99AK001 is in the operation stop state, the effect using the first movable body 99AK001 may not be determined by lottery, or the alternative when the effect using the first movable body 99AK001 is determined The effect of may be executed.

  If it is determined in step 99AKS001 that the first movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the return operation standby time set in step 99AKS006 has elapsed (step 99AKS007). If the return operation standby time has not elapsed (step 99AKS 007; No), the movable body abnormality determination processing is ended.

  If the return operation standby time has elapsed (step 99AKS007; Yes), operation control to return the first movable body 99AK001 to the origin position (to store the rod-shaped object 99AK010) is executed (step 99AKS008), and the first movable Clear the body error flag off (step 99AKS009). Thereafter, the movable body abnormality determination process is ended.

  If it is determined that the movable body 99AK001 is not in operation (Step 99AKS002; No), it is determined whether the second movable body error flag is on (Step 99AKS010). The second movable body error flag is set to ON when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002. That is, in step S99AKS010, it is determined whether or not an abnormality is occurring in the second movable body 99AK002.

  If the second movable body error flag is off (step 99AKS010; No), it is determined whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation (step 99AKS011). Whether or not the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation is whether or not an effect control pattern for operating the second movable body 99AK002 is set, and whether or not effect control based on the effect control pattern is being executed. It may be determined by If the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation of either the rotation operation or the home position return operation after the abnormality determination, it may be determined that the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation.

  The operation to be judged in step 99AKS011 does not include the initial operation (short initial operation, long initial operation). That is, in step 99AKS011, it is determined whether the movable body 99AK002 is in operation other than the initial operation. As a result, during the initial operation, monitoring of the occurrence of an abnormality (an abnormality caused mainly by the player) in the second movable body 99AK002 can be omitted, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, occurrence of abnormality in the second movable body 99AK002 may be monitored in at least one of the short initial operation and the long initial operation among the initial operations.

  When it is determined that the second movable body 99AK002 is in operation (step 99AKS011; Yes), a redetection time (for example, 5 seconds) until it is detected again whether the second movable body 99AK002 is operating normally. Is determined (step 99AKS012).

  If the re-detection time has elapsed (step 99AKS012; Yes), it is determined by the rotation detector 99AK023 whether or not the rotational motion of the circular character 99AK020 is detected (step 99AKS013). Step 99AKS013 determines whether or not the first movable body 99AK002 operates normally by the rotation detector 99AK023.

  If the second movable body 99AK002 is not in operation (Step 99AKS011; No), if the redetection time has not elapsed (Step 99AKS012; No), if the rotational motion of the circular character 99AK020 is detected (Step 99AKS013; Yes), the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If the rotational motion of the circular combination 99AK020 is not detected (Step 99AKS013; No), it is determined that the operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 has occurred, and the value of the error counter for counting the number of operation abnormalities is incremented by one. (Step 99AKS014).

  If the value of this error counter is not 2 (step 99AKS015; No), that is, if the value of the error counter is 1 and the detection of the operation abnormality of the second movable body 99AK002 is the first time, the second movable body A timer for measuring a redetection time (for example, 5 seconds) until it detects again whether 99AK002 is operating normally is set (started) (step 99AKS020), and the movable body abnormality determination processing is ended.

  If the value of the error counter is 2 (step 99AKS015; Yes), that is, if it is the second time that the second movable body 99AK002 detects an operation abnormality, the value of the error counter is reset to 0 (step 99AKS016). 2) Control is performed to stop the operation of the movable body 99AK002 (rotational operation of the circular combination 99AK020) (step 99AKS017). At step 99AKS017, the drive by the drive unit 99AK021 is stopped.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 is stopped when the operation abnormality is detected twice. During the return operation, the operation may be stopped when an operation error is detected once.

  Then, a second movable body error flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002 is set to ON (step 99AK018). In addition, after stopping the operation of the second movable body 99AK002, set (start) a timer for measuring the return operation standby time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the standby time until returning to the home position (Step 99AKS019) And the movable body abnormality determination processing is ended.

  If an operation abnormality is further detected in the second movable body 99AK002 in steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 during the recovery operation after the abnormality determination, the second movable body 99AK002 is thereafter continued until, for example, the initial operation at the time of power on again succeeds. You may make it the operation stop state which does not operate. When the second movable body 99AK002 is in the operation stop state, the effect using the second movable body 99AK002 may not be determined by lottery, or the alternative when the effect using the second movable body 99AK002 is determined The effect of may be executed.

  If it is determined in step 99AKS010 that the second movable body error flag is on (step 99AKS010; Yes), it is determined whether the return operation standby time set in step 99AKS019 has elapsed (step 99AKS021). If the return operation standby time has not elapsed (step 99AKS021; No), the movable body abnormality determination processing ends.

  If the return operation standby time has elapsed (step 99AKS021; Yes), operation control is performed to return the second movable body 99AK002 to the origin position (rotate the circular character 99AK020 to return to the origin position) (step 99AKS022) And the second movable body error flag is cleared (step 99AKS023). Thereafter, the movable body abnormality determination process is ended.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first movable body 99AK001 determines that an abnormality has occurred when the contact with the first movable body 99AK001 is detected, and the second movable body 99AK002 does not detect the rotational movement. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the Also, the first movable body 99AK001 stops its operation when the occurrence of an abnormality is detected once, and the second movable body 99AK002 stops its operation when the occurrence of an abnormality is detected twice. ing. As described above, by making the determination method of the abnormality different according to the type of the movable body, the abnormality determination can be performed according to the shape and the operation of the movable body, and the control for appropriately stopping the operation can be executed.

(Modification Example of Feature 99AK)
In addition, the abnormality determination method of each movable body is not limited to the method of this Example. For example, after the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 is started, the post-operation position detector 99AK013 detects that the rod-shaped object 99AK010 is in the post-operation position after a predetermined period (time to move to the protruding position) has elapsed. If it can not be performed, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first movable body 99AK001. In addition, after the start of the operation of the second movable body 99AK002, the origin position detector 99AK022 could not detect that the circular part 99AK020 is at the origin position after a predetermined period (time to return to the origin position) has elapsed. In this case, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the second movable body 99AK002. Further, when a foreign object is detected in the operation direction by a non-contact sensor, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  The abnormality determination method of the movable body may be determined in consideration of the shape, weight, rigidity, size, position, operation mode, operating speed, torque intensity, safety, etc. of the movable body. For example, in the case of a movable body in which it is preferable to stop the operation immediately for safety, it is preferable to adopt a method for determining abnormality promptly. Further, in the same movable body, the abnormality determination method may be made different depending on the operation mode. For example, in the above embodiment, the abnormality determination method may be different between the case where the first movable body 99AK001 operates up to the advanced position and the case where the first movable body 99AK001 operates up to the protruding position. By doing this, it is possible to execute suitable operation stop control according to the movable body.

  The first movable body 99AK001 and the second movable body 99AK002 stop the operation when an abnormality is detected during operation, and execute the operation for returning to the home position when the return operation standby time elapses after the operation is stopped. However, after the operation is stopped, the movable body may be put into the operation stop state without returning to the home position until the power is turned on next time.

  An abnormality notification unit may be provided to notify operation abnormality of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002. The abnormality notification means may be of any type as long as the occurrence of the operation abnormality is notified by the display on the image display device 5, the point of the lamp, the sound output, the signal output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. The abnormality notifying means may notify the operation abnormality in the initial operation in the case of monitoring the operation abnormality in the initial operation without notifying the operation abnormality in the progress of the game. By doing this, even if an operation abnormality occurs while the game is in progress, notification of the occurrence of the abnormality does not inhibit the progress of the game. In addition, during the initial operation, it becomes possible for the administrator or the like to find out the operation abnormality, and it becomes possible to cope with the movable body, etc.

  It may be possible to set the presence or absence and the operation mode of the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002. For example, the degree of projection of the first movable body 99AK001 and the rotational speed (maximum speed) of the second movable body 99AK002 may be set in advance. By doing this, it is possible to operate the movable body by the operation preferred by the player or the operation suited to the convenience of the hall.

  A configuration for enabling control of an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player based on the set value, and for changing the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation, and a set value set A configuration may be provided to make it possible to confirm by the display. When the setting value change operation is in progress (change permitted state), the short initial operation may be performed as an initial operation of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the change in the setting value from being disturbed by the operation of the movable body.

  Alternatively, the short initial operation may be performed when control is not performed in the change permission state with the start of power supply, and the short initial operation may not be performed when the change permission state is in effect. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the change in the setting value from being disturbed by the operation of the movable body.

  Also, when the short initial operation is performed when the power is turned on, the abnormality of the first movable body 99AK001 and / or the second movable body 99AK002 can be monitored by executing the movable body abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 8-13. You may In this case, the control for stopping the operation is immediately executed when an abnormality (for example, one contact) is detected for the movable body that interferes with the operator in the setting value changing operation and the confirmation operation. With regard to a movable body having a low possibility of interfering with the above, operation may be attempted even after an abnormality (for example, an operation abnormality) is detected, and control may be performed to stop the operation if it is further abnormal. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value due to the short initial operation.

(Description of means related to the feature 99AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 99AK is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first effect movable body (for example, a first movable body 99AK001L, a first movable body 99AK001R) provided so that the player can make contact with the player;
A second effect movable body (for example, a second movable body 99AK002) provided so that the player can make contact with the player;
And an operation control unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, drive unit 99AK011, drive unit 99AK021) for controlling the operation of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body.
The operation control means is
It is possible to execute control for stopping the operation during operation of the first effect movable body (for example, the processing of step 99AKS004 can be performed),
It is possible to execute control for stopping the operation during operation of the second effect movable body (for example, the processing of step 99AKS017 can be performed),
The operation is stopped under different conditions for the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (step 99AKS003 and steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 perform different determinations).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The first effect movable body is operable to change the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the first movable body 99AK001 projects outward as shown in FIG. 8-10),
The second effect movable body may be operable without changing the outer shape of the gaming machine (for example, the second movable body 99AK002 rotates).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It comprises abnormality determination means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means is
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body based on the determination result by the abnormality determination unit (for example, the process of step 99AKS004 can be performed).
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body based on the determination result by the abnormality determination unit (for example, the process of step 99AKS017 may be performed).
Control is performed so that the time from when it is determined that there is an abnormality to when the movable body for the second effect is abnormal before the movable body for the first effect is determined is longer (for example, the contact is detected in step 99AKS003) When it is done, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 may be stopped immediately, and the operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped when the second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
It comprises abnormality determination means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The operation control means is
The first effect movable body stops its operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality the first number of times (for example, the operation of the first movable body 99AK001 is stopped when one touch is detected in step 99AKS003),
The second effect movable body stops operation when it is determined that there is an abnormality a second number of times which is more than the first number of times (for example, when a second operation abnormality is detected in step 99AKS015) The operation of the second movable body 99AK002 may be stopped.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
It comprises abnormality determination means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015) capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body,
The abnormality determination means determines that the first effect movable body is abnormal when the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS003, it is determined that the contact is detected by the touch sensor 99AK014 as abnormal). ), It is determined that the second effect movable body is abnormal when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (for example, in step 99AKS013 when the rotation detector 99AK023 does not detect the rotation operation, the operation abnormality) May be determined to have occurred.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably stop the operation according to the type of effect movable body.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining the presence or absence of abnormality in the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 99AKS003 and step 99AKS013, 99AKS015);
A detection unit (for example, a touch sensor 99AK014) that detects a player's touch;
The abnormality determination unit determines the presence or absence of an abnormality in the first effect movable body based on the detection result by the detection unit (for example, in step 99AKS003, when the touch sensor 99AK014 detects a touch, it is determined that the abnormality is detected. It may be determined.
According to such a configuration, the effect movable body can be operated safely.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first effect movable body and the second effect movable body are each operable between an origin position and a post-operation position,
The operation control means is
After executing control to stop the operation during operation with the first effect movable body, it is possible to execute control to move the first effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, If it is determined in step 99AKS007 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS008 is executed),
After executing control to stop the operation during operation with the second effect movable body, it is possible to execute control to move the second effect movable body to the origin position after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, for example) If it is determined in step 99AKS021 that the return operation standby time has elapsed, the process of step 99AKS022 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
Movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the home position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member And CPU for effect control that executes command processing at power-on of the AKS 012),
The movable control unit may perform control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS 007) when the change permission state is set.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is performed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
And at least a movable control unit capable of executing control of return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position (for example, CPU 120 for effect control for executing command processing at the time of power on of step AKS012);
The movable control means is
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010);
When in the change permission state, control to execute the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not performed when the change permission state is in effect, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

(Description of the configuration regarding other features)
Next, other features in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature makes it possible to execute control of an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player based on the set value, and a configuration for making the set value changeable based on a predetermined setting change operation, and setting It has a configuration for making it possible to confirm the set value being displayed by display. The set value can be displayed with a configuration capable of displaying information related to the game value such as a prize ball provided based on the game medium such as a game ball entering the predetermined area.

  9-1 is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine 1 which concerns on this characteristic part. The same reference numerals as in the above embodiment denote the same parts as in the above embodiment. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. The case where the display result is "off" (hiragana) is similar to the case where the display result is "loss" (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game ball having passed (entered) any of the plurality of general winning openings 10 Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection.

  Connected to the effect control board 12 are operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving movable members to be movable roles (movable effect devices) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable members. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, the second large winning opening provided separately from the first large winning opening, which is a large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, is controlled to the small hitting gaming state. It will be in an open state in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the second big winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. It will be in the state. In this embodiment, the second large winning opening is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is limited thereto Instead, the game may be opened several times in the small hit gaming state. The second large winning opening is opened by the second large winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door is in the on state, and the gaming ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door is off, the game ball passes the second large winning opening with the second large winning opening closed by the second large winning opening door ( Do not enter. As described above, the second large winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. May be

  The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first large winning opening. The game ball passing (entering) the second large winning opening is detected by the second counting switch by passing the second counting switch installed in the second large winning opening. A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened, the gaming ball passes (enters other normal winning openings such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening). More balls will be paid out than when Therefore, when the second large winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball can enter the second large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second big winning opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning balls by passing the game ball to the second big winning opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes 2 states.

  A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which game balls can pass are installed inside the second large winning opening. The gaming ball having passed (entered) the second large winning opening passes either the third count switch or the fourth count switch, and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing the fourth count switch.

  In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hitting game, the gaming state after the small hitting game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Therefore, during the small hit game, when the second big winning opening door is open, if the course of the gaming ball is changed by adding vibration etc. and the gaming ball is detected by the third count switch, Since it becomes possible for the player to be injustified to be controlled to a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is arranged to stop the game in such a case.

  Inside the second big winning opening, there is provided a regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the gaming ball toward the third count switch. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state for restricting the flow toward the third count switch of the gaming ball and an allowable state for permitting the flow toward the third count switch of the gaming ball. It is done.

  In the small hit gaming state, when the game ball that has won the second large winning opening passes the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball (V prize big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the fourth count switch.

  And, when being controlled to the big hit game state on the basis of the passage of the 3rd count switch of the game ball, the 2nd large winning a prize oral door, the period until the specified upper limit time (for example 29 seconds) elapse or specified number For example, the second large winning opening is opened in a period until 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game in which the second large winning opening is set to the first state (opened state) advantageous to the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the second large winning opening is controlled to the first state when controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch, but the present invention It is not limited and the first big winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). It should be noted that even if the number of round game executions has not reached the upper limit number, the round game may end due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the fact that the game ball has not won the second big winning opening). Good.

  9-2 is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17 and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. The main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being stored in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 which can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display switching switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29 so that the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by the operation of the display switching switch 30.

  The main substrate 11 has a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of a glass door frame that covers the front of the game board 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) is also provided based on detection signals output from these sensors. The reset signal, the power-off signal, and the clear signal from the power supply substrate 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main substrate 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed at the center of the main substrate 11. A display change switch 30 is disposed. The display monitor 29 and the display switching switch 30 are disposed on the front when the main substrate 11 is viewed. The main board 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), each winning a prize mouth (the 1st big winning a prize mouth, the 2nd big winning a prize mouth, the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth, the 1st starting winning a prize mouth, a general winning a prize mouth, etc. "The number of game balls entered into the game" is counted, and various winning information such as consecutive ratio and winning ratio by counting are displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a winning ratio and a winning ratio after being installed in the game arcade. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the game board surface (to pass the test) so that the game balls enter the general winning opening with a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed, the game ball enters the general winning opening with the frequency as designed as a result of whether or not the adjustment has been performed, as a result of the adjustment. Are verified (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

  The power supply substrate 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC 100 V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electrical components including various control substrates such as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12. ing. The power supply substrate 17 is enclosed in a substrate case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set at the upper right of the back surface of the power supply substrate 17. A setting changeover switch 52 is provided which functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) in the big hit state in the change state. Further, the power supply substrate 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can not be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the person in charge can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, among the attendants of the game arcade, only the person who holds the key for operating the lock switch 51 can operate. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation with a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of executing an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation.

  When the power on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 is performed, such as switching on / off of the lock switch 51 or pressing the clear switch AK001. May be With the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a predetermined operation using these switches simultaneously may be performed along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be disposed at positions where simultaneous operations can be performed by an attendant of the game arcade or the like. As described above, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations serving as an on / off switching operation or a pressing operation by an attendant at a game arcade along with the power on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

  In the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are provided nozzles (discharge ports) for discharging the gaming balls that have won a prize in each winning opening and the gaming balls that entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The ejection slot switch 70 for detecting the game ball discharged | emitted from the inside of the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting the fired game ball) is provided in these. The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main substrate 11.

  FIG. 9C is an explanatory view of an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that this command form is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the special figure game using the second special view in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is displayed on the display device 5 so as to be variably displayed on the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variation display result notification command for specifying a variation display result such as a special symbol or a representation symbol. In the fluctuation display result notification command, when the fluctuation display result is "decision" or "big hit" or "small hit", the determination result (predetermined result) or the fluctuation display result is "big hit" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type of.

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variation display result specification command that indicates the result of the preliminary determination that the variation display result is "off". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop of variation (decision) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the memory content of the RAM 102 has been cleared along with the initialization in the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is. The command 9100 H is a setting change start command that designates the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command which designates execution of the power failure recovery processing corresponding to the power failure recovery. The command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the setting value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the setting value continuously set without being changed. When the setting value consists of three steps of 1 to 3, command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to "1", and command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to "2" The command 9302H may specify that the setting value is set to "3". Alternatively, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H may be prepared as the setting change end command, and the end of the setting change state may be designated by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a setting value specification command for specifying a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, along with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation start and response in each special figure game are handled. May be sent. In addition, for example, as the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, such as every 10 times of start of fluctuation in the special figure game, the setting value designation command may be transmitted. Instead of or in addition to these, the setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. The setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

  The command 9400 H is a setting confirmation start command for specifying the start of the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed when the power supply by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that designates the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specifying command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the generated error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified in the effect control board 12 side which error (abnormality) has been judged to be generated. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demo specification command for specifying display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (display of a demonstration screen) by display of an effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open designation command that specifies that the large winning opening is in an open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a designated command after the opening of the big winning opening which specifies that the period in which the big winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that a first starting condition for executing a special drawing game using a first special drawing in first special symbol display 4A is established. The command ball 200H is that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol indicator 4B was satisfied based on it.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for reporting the first special view pending storage number. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for reporting the second special view pending storage number. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D100H is a V-winner notification designating command for notifying that the third count switch has been turned on by the game ball passing the third count switch, that is, that the V winning is achieved. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to execute a V-winner notification effect for notifying that the V-winner has been awarded based on the reception of the V-winner notice designation command. In the V prize notification effect, depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it may be possible to determine different effect patterns, or may make the determination ratio of a plurality of effect patterns different. As described above, the setting value may be able to be suggested by the effect mode of the V prize notification effect. For example, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed as the effect mode of the V prize notification effect, an effect mode in which the rotational direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotational direction is counterclockwise are included. It may be Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which display colors of effect images indicating “V” are made different may be included. Then, the setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V prize notification designation command. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, it is possible to appropriately determine the effect mode according to the setting value.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value to be a gaming random number counted on the main substrate 11 side. In this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and a common figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100.

  In the present embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values in the range shown in FIG. 5, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these random numbers MR1 to MR5 May be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as reach fluctuation pattern. Further, a variation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of super reach, a plurality of normal reach such as normal reach α, normal reach β,. A variation pattern may be provided. In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1), a display result determination table (setting value 2), a display result determination table (setting value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, etc. are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to change the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit and the small hit according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (wining probability) corresponding to the setting value, the winning probability (outfall rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value is composed of three steps of 1 to 3. The highest withdrawal rate is 1; the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the withdrawal rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the degree of advantage gradually decreases.

  FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory view of a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is targeted for fluctuation display, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  FIG. 9-6A shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1. When using the display result judgment table corresponding to setting value 1, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is targeted for fluctuation indication, the setting value is “ 2), and wins a big hit with a probability (1/99) higher than the case of “3”, and a part of these determination values is set as a determination value corresponding to a small hit. It is designed to win a small hit with a probability (1/50) higher than when the value is "2" or "3". When using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second, it is the same as the case where the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/99) as the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display And a probability that the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (100/200), as half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits. It is supposed to win a small hit in).

  FIG. 9-6 (B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, it is a big hit with a lower probability (1/150) than the case where the setting value is "1". As well as winning, a part of these determination values is set as a determination value corresponding to a small hit, so that it has a probability (1/99) lower than that when the set value is “1”. It is supposed to win. When using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second, it is the same as the case where the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. In addition to being elected, and half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

  FIG. 9-6 (C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result judgment table corresponding to setting value 3, if the fluctuation special view designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is If the first special symbol is set as a variable display target, it is not set and therefore the big hit is at a lower probability (1/200) than in the case where the set value is "1" or "2". Wins but not a small hit (wining probability: 0). When using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second, it is the same as the case where the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display In addition to being elected, and half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1" or "2".

  The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit regarding the special symbol (big hit A ~ Decide to be a big hit C). Also, if the MR 1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits, it is determined to be a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. Note that “probability” indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit is to decide whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a big hit symbol It is also to decide whether or not to In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. As described above, since the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is different according to the setting value, if the setting value is changed, 1 setting is made in a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player. Will be changed to other settings.

  In the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, although the win probability of the small hit in the case where the variation special drawing designation buffer is the second is all the same, the set values 1, 2, 3 in the order of the small hits. The probability of winning may be lowered. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is lowered in the order of the setting values 1, 2 and 3, but the same as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second Alternatively, the same winning probability may be set for all setting values.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table, but separately provides a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table, and The determination is made using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special design designation buffer, and the determination of the small hit is Separate tables may be used for the case where the variation special feature designation buffer is the first and the case where it is the second.

  In this embodiment, when the variation special view designation buffer is the first when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, a determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the determination value corresponding to the small hit. Although not set, that is, the small hit was not elected, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, so that the small hit is won You may That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hitting probability differs according to the set value set includes that the small hitting probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The set value that can be set to may be two or four or more (e.g. six). In addition, the player's degree of advantage according to the set value is not limited to one in which the player's degree of advantage increases as the set value is smaller, and as the set value is larger, the player's degree of advantage also increases. It is also good. For example, when the setting value consists of six steps from 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest, and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, the higher the withdrawal rate, and It may be the one with the highest payout rate. As described above, the larger the value, the lower the degree of advantage for the player when 1 is set as the set value, and the higher the degree of advantage for the player when 6 is set. The degree of advantage may be increased stepwise.

  FIGS. 9-7 is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table and a small hit classification determination table. The jackpot type determination table is one of the jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (MR2) when it is judged that the variable display result is to be the jackpot symbol. Referenced to determine. The small hit type judgment table is based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type judgment when the variable display result is judged to be a small hit symbol, the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit B. Referenced to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit type of the big hit type of the big hit D is executed It has become. In addition, when the game ball passes the 3rd count switch during the small hitting B small hitting game, namely when V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit E is executed . These big hit D and big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for hit type judgment extracted at the start winning, but the game ball is the second during any small hit game of the small hit A and the small hit B It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the 3 count switch has passed.

  9-7 (A) has shown the big hit classification determination table (for the first special symbol). The jackpot classification determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold storage based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) the jackpot type It is referred when deciding.

  9-7 (B) has shown the big hit classification determination table (for 2nd special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning a second start winning opening (ie, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) the jackpot type It is referred when deciding.

  FIG. 9-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit classification determination table is referred to when the small hit classification is determined regardless of which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening the game ball is on hold storage based on winning in either .

  FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory view of a jackpot type in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, as a big hit type, big hit A and big hit D where time saving control is not executed after the end of big hit gaming state, and big hit B, big hit C and big hit E where time saving control is executed after the end of big hit gaming state It is set. Of the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit C and the big hit E are regarded as the most advantageous big hit for the player, and the big hit A and the big hit D are considered as the most disadvantageous big hit for the player. Also, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is considered to be a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit A is a big hit repeated five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the first big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, time saving control is not executed. The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed twenty times or until a special hit game is executed twenty times, a big hit occurs again. The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is executed 100 times until a big hit occurs again. The big hit D is a big hit repeated four times (so-called four rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of big hit D. The big hit E is a big hit repeated 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is played 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  In addition, big hit D and big hit E make the big winning opening of opening object the 2nd big winning opening, but this invention is not something which is limited to this, big winning opening of opening target of big hit D and big hit E , May be the first big winning opening. That is, for the small hit game, the second large winning opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hitting game, the first large winning hole is replaced with the first large winning hole. You just have to open the big winning opening.

  In the time saving state, the probability of being "per common" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur because a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It becomes easy to generate continuously without passing through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous channel state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which time reduction control is executed is set to 20 times, a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, and the game ball is the second The ratio of passing the 3 count switch (the ratio of the game ball winning V and generating a big hit during the special figure game of 20 times) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit C and big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which time reduction control is executed is set to 100 times, a small hit occurs during 100 special figure games The rate at which the game ball passes the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins V and a big hit occurs during the special figure game of 100 times) is set to approximately 100%.

  In the present embodiment, five types of big hit A to big hit E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, six or more types of big hit types may be provided, and 4 Types or less may be provided.

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 49 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the jackpot A, 50 ~ 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 149 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, the ratio for determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is low in the order of set values 1, 2, 3 I am trying to be

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 29 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 are assigned to the big hit A, and 30 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 69 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 in the range 0 to 299 of the MR2 judgment values are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. In this manner, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio for determining the big hit B, C for which time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is the big hit in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when it occurs, and becomes lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value set is 1, the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit C is the highest, then the rate at which the big hit B is determined is the highest, and the rate determined to be the big hit A is The lowest (big hit type determination ratio at setting value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). Also, when the set value set is 2, the determination rate is the highest for the big hit type B. Then the rate for determining the big hit A is high, and the percentage determined for the big hit C is the lowest. Big hit classification decision ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Furthermore, when the set value set is 3, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot A is the highest, then the rate at which the jackpot B is determined is the highest, and the rate at which the jackpot C is determined is the lowest. There is a big hit type determination ratio at the setting value 3: big hit A> big hit B> big hit C).

  Note that depending on the set values that have been set, there may be one or more jackpot types that are not determined among the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. That is, depending on the set value being set, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may differ by not determining any one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%) or 100% of the specific jackpot types. It is included to determine in proportions.

  In the small hit type judgment table, when the set value is “1”, 0 to 99 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 is small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 149 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. There is. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 is assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. There is. Thus, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small hit game, the ratio for determining a big hit E in which the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 times is 20 times It is higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D, and lower in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value set is 1, V prize is generated during the small hitting game by the small hitting B being determined as the small hitting type at a higher rate than the small hitting A. The rate at which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit E is higher than the rate at which the big hit is determined to be the big hit D. In addition, when the set value which is set is 2, by the small hitting A and the small hitting B being decided with the same ratio as the small hitting classification, V winning a prize occurs in the small hitting game The ratio that the big hit type is determined to be the big hit D and the percentage that is determined to be the big hit E are equal (based on the big hit type determination rate by V winning in setting value 2: big hit E = big hit D). Furthermore, if the set value set is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, based on the occurrence of the V winning in the small hit game. The rate at which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit D is higher than the rate at which the big hit E is determined (the big hit type determination rate by the V winning in the setting value 1: big hit D> big hit E).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variation display result is the big hit according to the set value set, and the determination ratio of the big hit type when the V winning is generated are different. That is, the type of the small hit gaming state controlled according to the set value set changes, and the type of the big hit gaming state controlled when the V winning is generated may change, It has become possible to improve the game interest.

  In addition, depending on the set value that is set, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, in order for the determination ratio of the small hit type to be different according to the set value being set, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hitting type may be different depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different ratio according to the fluctuation special drawing, there may be small small hitting classifications which are not determined among the small hitting A and the small hitting B depending on the fluctuation special figure. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the fluctuation special figure, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type It is also included to make decisions at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for the special view display result determination. The larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The big hit type and the small hit type are not limited to different ones depending on the set value being set, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same decision ratio for all set values.

  The game property itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the game property may change according to the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the gaming property (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal status is 1/320 and the probability status is 65% When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game is ended based on the game ball passing the third count switch during the big hit game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be a game characteristic (so-called V probability variation type) in which the ratio of the game ball passes the third count switch during the big hit game according to the variation special view while controlling the later gaming state to the definite variation state. If the setting value set in is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes the third count switch during high base (during time reduction control) Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state (so-called one two-kind mixed type) based on the. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3 in the game property, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3 A setting in which the number of award balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided. When changing the gameplay according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation every time the game ball passes the third count switch), When the setting value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a gaming switch (a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probability changing state or a big hit gaming state based on the passage of the gaming ball through the third count switch) You may use it.

  The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the pre-decision result. As the fluctuation pattern judgment table, it is previously determined that the fluctuation pattern judgment table used for the big hit when the fluctuation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance and the fluctuation display result is "small hit" A jackpot variation pattern determination table to be used at the time of occurrence and a deviation variation pattern determination table to be used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “off” are prepared in advance.

  FIGS. 9-9 is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit variation pattern determination table and the small hit variation pattern determination table. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to determine the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is to be the jackpot symbol. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to determine the variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is to be a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 9-9 (A) shows a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot A. In the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit from 0 to 300 within the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 (PB1-1 Is assigned to the super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 350 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

  9-9 (B) shows a variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit B, big hit C). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C. In the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (from 0 to 997 within the judgment value range of MR3) Assigned to PB1-1), and assigned to the variation pattern of Super Reach α big hit (PB1-2) from 101 to 350, variation patterns from Super Reach β big hit to 351 to 997 (PB1-3) Assigned to When the set value is “2”, within 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value range, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 within the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB 1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

  The fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit (for big hit A) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit (for big hit B, big hit C), the fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hit (PB1- 2) For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, a predetermined random value is allocated as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. When the big hit A is won in the special figure game, the ratio determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is higher than the ratio determining the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3), And, the set values 1, 2, and 3 become lower in this order. In addition, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the ratio determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit It is higher than the ratio, and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. In the present embodiment, the super reach β is easily determined when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is determined when the type of big hit is “big hit A”. In order to be easily determined, the determination value is assigned to increase the player's sense of expectation that "big hit B" or "big hit C" may occur when the variation pattern of super reach β is executed. It can be done.

  FIG. 9-9 (C) shows a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 within the range of 0 to 997 of the MR3 determination value is a small hit, regardless of whether the set value is “1”, “2”, or “3”. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value within the range that can be taken by random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). It is done. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit, The variation patterns of the small hitting may be determined at different rates from the plurality of variation patterns with the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”.

  FIGS. 9-10 is an explanatory view of a variation pattern determination table for removal. When it is determined that the variation display pattern is to be a removal symbol, the variation pattern determination table for removal is referred to determine the variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  9-10 (A) shows the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table A. FIG. The variation pattern determination table for release A is referred to when the number of memories to be stored is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not under the time-saving control. In the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A, the non-reach outlier fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), the super reach With respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation, a predetermined random value is allocated as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

  9-10 (B) shows the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table B. FIG. The out-point variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α, corresponding to a total of 2 to 4 pending storages. A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3) There is.

  9-10 (C) shows the variation pattern determination table C for disconnection. The out-point variation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach α A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3) There is.

  9-10 (D) shows the variation pattern determination table D for disconnection. The variation pattern determination table D for release is referred to when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed. In the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers, the shortening non-reach outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach outlier fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time-shortening control -2) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the deviation of the super reach β.

  In the case of using outlier fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, the ratio for determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than that for determining the super reach fluctuation pattern and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3 It is supposed to be. In addition, in the case of using the outlier fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, among the determination values from 701 to 900 are the variation patterns of the super reach α and the variations 901 to 997 are the deviation of the super reach β. If the fluctuation pattern is assigned, that is, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination rate regardless of the set value set, so the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the rendering effect from being reduced by the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  In addition to the “common determination ratio”, other than those having different setting values but having completely the same determination ratio (this embodiment), those having different setting values having the same determination ratio (for example, the setting value) Between 1 and the set value 3, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach differs by about 1%. When the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is not limited to the same regardless of the set value set, and when the variation display result is a loss, The determination rates for all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set values, and only the determination rates of either non-reach or normal reach variation patterns It may be identical. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value being set, the setting ratio for which both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of variation pattern of super reach β are set is set Regardless of whether it is not limited to the form being the same, if the variation display result is out, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α deviation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β is The determination ratio of may be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value being set, the setting ratio for which both the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of variation pattern of super reach β are set is set It is not limited to the form which is the same regardless of it, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the setting value at which the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set regardless of the setting value set. It may be the same regardless of. When the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is not limited to a form different according to the set value which is set, and depending on the set value which is set, it is not Among reach variation patterns and normal reach variation patterns, there may be one or more variation patterns that can not be determined. Depending on the setting value being set, the variation pattern determination ratio may not be determined by not determining one of the variation patterns (the determination ratio is 0%), or by 100% of a specific variation pattern. It is also included to make decisions. It is not limited to the form which determines a change pattern using the change pattern determination table for different according to the total number of pending storages, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol of change object (for example, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol) If you want to execute the 1st special symbol for the number of pending storage, if you want to perform the second special symbol variation display 2nd special symbol for the number of pending storage) different variation pattern determination table for deviation using the variation pattern You may decide

  In each variation variation pattern determination table for outliers, the variation pattern of super reach variation (PA2-2 and PA2-3) regardless of whether the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3 The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the big hit probability and the loss probability differ according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss) The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern is different according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, according to the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not limited to the form from which the ratio in which the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach out differs, and the big hit probability for every setting value The variation display may be executed with the variation pattern of the out-of-super reach at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in consideration of the out-of-place probability.

  9-11 show the game control data holding area 150. FIG. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common drawing reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. A game control counter setting unit 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special view reserve storage unit 151A stores the reserve data regarding the variable display of the first special view in the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition by passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The first start condition is established by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning being generated. The reserve data stored in the first special figure reserve storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is not yet started but is pending, and the variation display result in this special figure game It becomes the suspension information which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special view display result).

  The second special view reserve storage unit 151B stores reserve data regarding the variable display of the second special view in the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, the second start condition of the passing (enter) of the game balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The second start condition is established by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning being generated. The reserve data stored in the second special figure reserve storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is not yet started but is pending, and the variation display result in the special figure game It becomes the suspension information which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special view display result).

  It should be noted that the game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 For example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103 Numeric data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  A description will be given of tallying of game balls on the main substrate 11 of the present embodiment and display of the feature ratio and the like. The main board 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning in the first start winning opening (Hezo), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (electric chew), the first large The number of winning balls by winning on the winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the total number of winning balls are input, and the number of firing balls is counted, and the display monitor 29 is the first winning hole of the total winning balls and Number ratio of winning balls from the second big winning opening (attacker), which is the percentage of winning balls, and the number of winning balls from the second starting winning hole (electric chew) among the total winning balls The ratio (%) which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning in the 1 big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker), the base (%) which is the ratio of winning balls to the total number of playing balls Is to be displayed. The consecutive ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters obtained as described below) due to the winnings to the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker) ( It is a ratio that the following character acquisition ball number occupies. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls played to the total number of balls. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is determined by the number of winning balls by winning on the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the winning on the second starting winning opening (electric chew) Prize balls from the winning balls (1st starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the winning balls, and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the 1st big winning a prize opening and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth (attacker) and the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth (electric thu) are the variable winning a prize, the passing possible width of the game ball fluctuates, winning of the game ball It is a feature whose assumed percentage changes. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is a fixed winning combination, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed feature.

  As a tabulation and calculation method of information on winnings in a game, the winning ratio and winning ratio are determined by winning a first start winning opening (Heso) and a general winning opening (Sode) with 6000 winning balls. The number (general award ball number), the number of prize balls by winning in the second start winning hole (electric chew), the number of ordinary electric service prize balls (electric chew ball number), the first big winning hole and the second big winning The special electronic combination prize ball number (attacker prize ball number) which is the prize ball number by winning in the mouth (attacker) is totaled. The total is regarded as one set, and 10 sets, that is, a ratio (%) for 60000, and a ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize ball number) by winning in the first starting winning opening (Heso) and general winning hole (Sode) to be counted, the number of regular electric circuit prize balls (electric chew prize ball number), special electric The award winning ball number (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set ing. That is, a considerable number (for example, several bytes) of storage for 11 sets of 6,000 sets is stored, and it is possible to calculate a running ratio (%) and a playing ratio (%) of their totals. In addition, with regard to the base, the number of game balls hit against the number of 60000 winning balls is counted. The count is regarded as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 winning balls to the number of game balls hit is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 is a base calculated on the basis of a continuous ratio (%), a role ratio (%), and a continuous ratio (%), a role ratio (%), and 60000 winning balls in the previous time The base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the base 1 (%) and the last 60000 winning balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, the six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display everything, but the number of winning balls by winning on the first starting winning opening (Heso) counted up as the game progresses, to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) The number of winning balls by the winnings and the number of winning balls by the winnings at the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the number of winning balls won after displaying a ratio of 6,000 (%) is reflected in the ratio of 0000 (%) displayed after that, 6,000 will be displayed. Discrepancies may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) of 60000. Therefore, the number of winning balls by the winning of the first start winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by the winning of the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) Such deviations can be made if the number of winning balls by winning and the total number of winning balls are input, and counting is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, display timing of a ratio (%) for 6,000 pieces) in switching display. You can prevent.

  In addition, the storage area in which the information on the winning of the game in the present embodiment is stored is provided for each set value, and the general winning prize ball, the first starting mouth prize ball, the ordinary electric circuit winning ball, the special electric circuit winning prize The ball, the prize ball total, and the hit total are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value set. For this reason, it is possible to separately calculate each combination value, combination ratio, and base of the present embodiment for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) The method of calculating the character ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the number of character acquisition balls is 42000 which is the sum of the number of winning balls and the number of prizes obtained by In the following description, the total winning ball number means the total cumulative number of gaming media (winning balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the prize winning ball number refers to the total number of game media paid out by the game media winning in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the continuous winning thing winning ball number refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by the game media winning the attacker. The total hit number refers to the total number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of winning balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the coupling ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the duty ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Reciprocal ratio = [continuous character acquisition ball number / total acquisition number] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(continuous character acquisition ball number + character acquisition ball number) / total acquisition number] × 100 ... (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of winning balls) / total hit number] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of obtained balls is 42000, the character ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point) by dividing 42000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not perform the calculation below the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of balls obtained by the bonus is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. And this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. And divide 42000 by 600. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

  Although the total number of winning balls is 60000 in the above-described example, a 3-byte area is provided as a region for storing the total number of winning balls in order to calculate the feature ratio of a long period. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA 60h in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A 410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the bonus item acquisition ball number as well. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  A third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, that is, the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded off, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%. In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of winning balls and the number of obtained balls are 10 times. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the feature ratio is extended, and approximates to the original value.

  In the calculation of the duty ratio (%), for example, assuming that the total number of obtained balls is 34,321 and the number of obtained balls is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34,321 against 19876 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912 and so on, which is calculated to be about 57.9% of the part ratio (%). In the case of performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with the decimal point must be avoided, so the following calculation formula is used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34,321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded off, resulting in 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the decimal part is rounded off, it is calculated to be 57% of the part ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 29. In this case, the value calculated by the correct calculation is an error on the display There will be no

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of obtained objects are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when converted to the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, there is an error of + 0.3% at 32799/327 = 100.3%. For example, when the decimal point is rounded down and the calculation is performed, the correct value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%. Although an error of% is considered to be displayed, the ratio (%) (or a ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error also on the display of an error of 1%.

  Further, in the case of using the above calculation method, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation can not be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Furthermore, the error is gradually increased when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in an even larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, the display ratio (%) and the link ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired spheres (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter. Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that the error may be large, by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, blinking the displayed value, or the like.

  The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated, and may be continuously stored. This storage area may include a ring buffer, and may constitute, for example, a total of 10 sets of total buffers and a total number of prize balls buffer obtained by adding information on game winnings stored in the ring buffer having 10 counters of up to 2 bytes. . In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the bonus ball acquisition ball number is larger than the stored value of the total ball number, or the character Initialization of the storage area where information on winning of the game is stored when an event that can not occur as a situation is detected, for example, when the value of the continuous winning object winning ball number is larger than the value of the winning ball number You may process. In addition, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error processing or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the error display or the warning display.

  Note that when it is necessary to recalculate the ratio or ratio, such as when there is a problem in calculating the ratio or ratio, operate the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001. By doing this, the data used for the serial ratio or the duty ratio stored in the non-volatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch may be disposed on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an attendant of the game arcade can not easily operate, such as a predetermined position of the power supply substrate 17. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

  The substrate case 201 is formed of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be viewed. The substrate case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing the heat of the electrical component of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 is disposed at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiation holes. Here, “directly on the front” means directly on the main substrate 11 as a point of view, and means between the staff and the like of the game arcade in which the main substrate 11 is to be viewed and the main substrate 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays a combination ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), and a base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds) and displays Do. In this case, for example, while displaying a part ratio (%) for 5 seconds, a phenomenon occurs that a game medium is newly awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the ratio calculated according to it is repeated ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of%), there is a possibility that the value of the part ratio (%) and the value of the continuous part (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display values calculated and calculated within the same interrupt as the duty ratio (%) and the coupling ratio (%). When the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 segments are provided), 100% can not be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 29 can display numerical values in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, numerical values may be displayed in part of the upper two digits. In addition, it is not limited to the form which detects that a game medium has won by the sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric Chu, and it is not limited to the form which totals the number of prize balls individually based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge passage where the game medium that has won the prize and the game medium that has won the electric chow are discharged merges, and based on the detection result, the number of balls for winning things and the number of balls for continuous winning things May be counted.

  The main substrate 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. On the back side of the game board 2, besides the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided. The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In addition, it is not limited to the form which totals the number of winnings of the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) with the big winning number counter, it counts the number of winnings to these 1st big winning opening The first big winning number counter and the second big winning number counter that counts the number of winnings to the second big winning opening are individually provided, and the number of winnings for the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening The number of winnings may be separately counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  9-12 show the arrangement of the display monitor 29 and the display contents. The main substrate 11 is housed in the substrate case 201. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the substrate case 201. By providing the caulking pins 11 B, the main substrate 11 is completely sealed in the substrate case 201, and an illegal act on the main substrate 11 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 11. In addition, a sealing seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The sealing seal 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 11S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is interrupted, such as the front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. . Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is configured by seven segments each including seven segments that draw the character of "8" and dots disposed at the lower right of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), the display monitor 29 displays items of display Nos. 1 to 6. The first display portion 29A of the first digit displays set values (1-3) tabulated, and the second display portion 29B of the second digit and the third display portion 29C of the third digit display the aggregation period The numerical values are displayed as percentages in the fourth display unit 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E of the fifth digit. In the display No. 1, the short term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short term duty ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total ratio of cumulative totals is displayed, and in display No. 4, the ratio of total cumulative totals is displayed. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 winning balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately previous 60000 winning balls is displayed Be done. The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for which the total cumulative total is determined means a total period after starting calculation of the ratio, combination ratio, or total ratio after resetting the calculation of the combination ratio or ratio once. In the above-mentioned example, although a continuation ratio, a part ratio, and a base are calculated irrespective of a game state, you may calculate in consideration of a game state. For example, the ratio may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of winning balls. In addition, as the ratio of winning balls by winning to the second starting winning opening during high base state and winning balls by winning to big winning opening during the big hit gaming state among the winning balls total number It is also good. Also, the bases may be separately calculated in the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term linkage ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and the second combination of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term linkage ratio of display No1 is displayed, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the short-term linkage ratio as a percentage (% display) and display the short-term combination ratio of display No2 In the case of the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the short-term winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display). When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) in the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When displayed, the fourth to fifth display parts 29D and 29E display the percentage of total cumulative winning percentage. Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, and the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the display 29B and the third display 29C. When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, total cumulative linkage ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on fourth display unit 29D and fifth display unit 29E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative winning percentage is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  The main substrate 11 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening in calculating the combination ratio, the winning ratio and the base. The number of game balls entering the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are counted. In the main processing, the CPU 103 performs the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning port switch 26A to the fourth general A switch process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharge port switch 70. In the switch processing, it is specified to which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the first (3) Add the values of the general winning number counter and the fourth general winning number counter, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, add the value of the hit number counter , Counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. As described above, the steps for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area are executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including in the switch process, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the execution program. It has become.

  FIG. 9-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of winning balls to each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening based on the counted number of gaming balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls paid out by one winning for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is predetermined for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each prize opening classified is the number of general prize mouth prize balls (prize balls from the first regular prize mouth to the fourth regular prize mouth (Sode)), the first start prize mouth prize ball (first prize winning ball) (1) Prize balls by winning prizes in the start winning entry (heso)), ordinary electric pole prize balls (prising balls by prize winning electric chew), special electric pole prize balls (prising balls by awarding attackers) is there. In addition, the RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls and the number of game balls hit. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game ball wins to the general winning opening and the number of game ball wins to the first start winning opening, but the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first start The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be collectively collected. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general winning prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting winning ball are calculated separately, the number of winning balls for the general winning mouth ball and the number of the first starting winning pit The number of winning balls and the number of winning balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of prize balls obtained by winning into each winning opening for every 6,000 number of prize balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer is provided with a 0-th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls. The number of winning balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added to the zeroth storage area. Eleven storage areas of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store data of 256 × 256 = 65536, and up to 6000 data can be stored with room. In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total sum for each winning opening. There is. The storage area for 10 sets of totals and total totals is configured with a maximum of 3 bytes of counter, so it can store 256 x 256 x 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60000 pieces of data have a margin. It can be stored.

  The RAM 102 stores a continuous ratio storage area for storing 10 combinations and total cumulative ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2) and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and combination ratio of 10 sets and total cumulative total by the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to 10 sets and total cumulative total winning openings, 10 sets equivalent And storing the combination ratio of the total accumulation and the combination ratio in a combination ratio storage area. The combination ratio storage area storing 10 combinations and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination ratio are each configured by a maximum of 1 byte counter. For example, in the case of storing the ratio and combination of 10 sets and the total total as integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1-byte counter with a margin. The CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates the base for 10 sets by the number of hits for the game balls to the 10 winning sets, and calculates the base for 10 sets (base 2) The base storage area stores a base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of game balls awarded to each winning opening for 10 sets of. For example, when storing base 1 and base 2 in integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1 byte counter with allowance.

  9-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. FIG. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102 and the like. The address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is allocated to a built-in ROM area which is a ROM area of the memory space (in the embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH of 20000H to 2FFFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH is a program management area), and the CPU 103 Data is read from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and registers to the register through this built-in register area. Write data. The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is allocated to the built-in RAM area which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or Write data to the RAM 102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC 0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

  FIG. 9-15 shows an RWM area which is a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (op code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplemental data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be executed (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

  Data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area, a storage area for storing the total cumulative total of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio combination storage area for the total total are provided. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls per winning opening (10 sets A storage area for the sum of 10) and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other is stored. One byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) has one byte. If the data is more than the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in units of 1 byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses of the RAM control area. .

  9-16 show an example of control of display on the display monitor 29. FIG. The main substrate 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 sequentially displays a plurality of items.

  9-16 (A) is a time chart which shows the aspect of the display change in the display monitor 29. FIG. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display No. 1 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. If the display of display No 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative link ratio of display No 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. If the display No. 3 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative duty ratio of display No 4 is displayed in red. If the display No. 4 is continued for 5 seconds, Base 1 of No. 5 is displayed. The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of display No 5 continues for 5 seconds, base 2 of display No 6 is displayed. The display of base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. When the display No. 6 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds from the short-term continuity ratio of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6. As the color of the display, only the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. As described above, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 9-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the short-term continuous ratio. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term-combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, a short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative link ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B4) shows a case where the total cumulative winning combination of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display portion 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Is displayed. In addition, a total cumulative winning combination is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative winning ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  9-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the base 1 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  9-16 (B6) show a case where the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  The display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display switching switch 30 There is. For example, when the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the operation of the display switching switch 30 As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of total cumulative winning combination, Base 1 and Base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". By the operation of the display changeover switch 30 when the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-accumulation combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2” is performed, While the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total accumulation displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the duty ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". By the operation of the display switching switch 30 when the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3” is performed, While the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total accumulation displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the duty ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a mode capable of displaying the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base at each set value, and only one numerical value or one of the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base is used. Only any two numerical values may be displayed. The present invention is not limited to a mode in which a ratio, a part ratio, and a base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated, and the ratio, part ratio, and base are displayed on the display monitor 29. A history of the number of award balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the role ratio and the base. In the display monitor 29, only the short-term link ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term link ratio, the total cumulative link ratio, the total cumulative link ratio, base 1 and base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green. The short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are the same as different from the short-term combined ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio It may be displayed in color.

  FIGS. 9-17 show an example of execution of updating in the active buffer and ring buffer. In the main substrate 11, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the storage area of the sum total and the total accumulation for 10 sets, the combination ratio storage area storing the combination ratio of 10 sets and the total accumulation, and the transmission ratio is respectively updated. At this time, the numerical value stored in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer The storage area to the tenth storage area are moved. For example, the number of prize balls for the general prize winning prize balls in the 0th to 9th memory areas is "27" "81" "120" "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6,000, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is "27", "81", and "120". "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Along with this, the number of winning balls in the zeroth storage area is set to "0", and the number of winning balls in the tenth storage area is erased. When the number of winning balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the stored number of winning balls may be once erased and then a new number of winning balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new winning number may be stored by overwriting the stored winning number.

(Description of game control regarding other feature parts)
9-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in the present embodiment. This main process may be executed instead of the game control main process. In the main processing, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step Sa3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) etc. (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed It sets to (step Sa5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Subsequently, based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001, it is determined whether the clear switch AK001 is on (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed (step Sa7). When the power-off detection process is performed, it is determined whether the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the top address of the backup setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa41), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). Thereby, the memory content at the time of the power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored.

  When power failure recovery is performed in step Sa42, it is determined whether the lock switch 51 is on or not based on the lock switch signal which is an output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is on in step AKS001, the setting confirmation process is executed (step AKS002), and the set value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation process, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. If the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 182.

  When execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is started. A command 9400H to be a command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set to a gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, firing of the game ball by the operation of the bat operating handle 30, detection of the game ball by the various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, ordinary In the symbol display unit 20, control may be performed to stop and display the off symbol or the like, or to perform display corresponding to the game stop state different from the off symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying this end, and the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Be done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or if the check result in step Sa8 is not normal, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear data other than the setting value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information on the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Following step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa10), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. When the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10. Therefore, the clear switch AK001 detects the operation of pressing the on state. The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, the setting change process is performed (step Sa13), whereby the set value can be changed. In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change state of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. If the lock switch 51 is off at step Sa12 or after the setting change process is performed at step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  If the lock switch 51 is off at step Sa12, a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on condition that the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is further executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

  When execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state as the change permitting state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is changed, and the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Then, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, as in the case of the setting confirmation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be put into the game stop state. When execution of setting change processing in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the game stop state accompanying this are ended, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, setting is made if the lock switch 51 is on if the power-off inspection process is not executed or if the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The present invention is not limited to the mode of executing the change process, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

  Thereafter, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, setting of interrupt prohibition (step Sa17), display random number update processing (step Sa18), initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and setting of interrupt permission (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  When executing the special symbol normal processing in the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 is based on the display result determination table according to the set value set and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for the variable display result determination. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect design is to be the "big hit" or the "small hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, any of plural types of fluctuation patterns can be used by using the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the set value set and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. You just have to decide. As described above, it is possible to advance the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different by determining the variable display result or the like by the ratio different according to the set value set.

  In the present embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6 of the main processing, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the set value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the state where the set value can be changed is ended. . That is, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12. If the stored contents are initialized (cleared) and the lock switch 51 is on at step Sa12, the setting change process is executed at step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to Sa9 are performed. You may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the storage content of the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the presentation control board 12 starts initialization notification upon receipt of the RAM clear notification command. There is a thing. Therefore, when steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed prior to step Sa13, when the setting change processing is executed at step Sa13 and the set value can be changed, initialization notification is performed and set. There is a risk that problems will occur in changing the value. On the other hand, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by the steps Sa9 to Sa11 after the setting change process of the step Sa13 is completed, and the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the setting value is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing setting values.

  FIGS. 9-19 show display modes of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), when a ratio, a duty ratio, a base or the like is displayed on the display monitor 29, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff of the game arcade or the like, and the power supply is cut off. When it is stopped, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), the display on the display monitor 29 ends. After that, when the staff of the game arcade operates the clear switch AK001 and turns on the lock switch 51, the power switch AK002 is operated to start the power supply by turning on the power, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19C, on the display monitor 29, the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is depressed by a person in the game arcade or the like while the setting value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display portion 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting change switch 52 is detected, if “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to “2”, and if “2” is displayed, “3” is displayed. It is sufficient that the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between “1” and “3” by updating and updating to “1” if “3” is displayed. Thereafter, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the setting value displayed on the first display portion 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage) when the operation is detected. Do. At this time, the first display unit 29A is displayed in a blinking manner to notify that the staff in the game arcade can recognize that a new set value has been stored.

  When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the storage content of the RAM 102 is initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the pending storage based on the pending data and the like in the first special view pending storage unit 151A and the second special view pending storage unit 151B is erased. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the setting change processing is ended when the operation is detected. The CPU 103 becomes capable of playing a game by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the determination lottery of the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the winning balls, etc. become executable. The setting change process is not limited to a mode in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 29. For example, the setting value most advantageous for the player A preset set value may be displayed, such as “1” or “3” which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player.

  In the setting change process, control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical values displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to a form in which updating is performed each time a pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. For example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, the display may be updated and displayed. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed in a state where the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, If "" is displayed, update to "2", if "2" is displayed, update to "3", and if "3" is displayed, update to "1". It is sufficient if the display of the display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between “1” and “3”. In this case, the clear switch AK001 used to initialize the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used to change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented.

  FIG. 9-20 shows the display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 9-20 (A), when a ratio, a duty ratio, a base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff of the game arcade or the like, and the power supply is cut off. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (B). After that, when the power supply is started by operating the power switch AK002 by operating the power switch AK002 while the lock switch 51 is switched on without pressing the clear switch AK001 by a person in charge at the game arcade or the like, As shown in 9-20 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. In the state where the setting value is displayed, even if the setting change switch 52 is pressed by a person in the game arcade or the like, the numerical value displayed on the first display portion 29A can not be updated and displayed. Thereafter, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the setting confirmation processing is ended when the operation is detected. The CPU 103 becomes capable of playing a game by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the determination lottery of the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the winning balls, etc. become executable.

  As described above, it is possible to display, on the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, information on the gaming value in which adjustment of the number of winning balls after installation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. The display monitor 29 can display information of setting values for advancing the game such that the degree of advantage for the player differs by changing the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the setting value separately from the display device for displaying information regarding gaming value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in pachinko gaming machine 1 it can.

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and to display the ratio, combination ratio, base, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this. While the display monitor 29 is used to display the continuous ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like, the display of setting values is performed using a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. It is also good. This makes it possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the ratio, the duty ratio, the base and the like using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit, for example. The processing by the control program or the like can be distributed and simplified to reduce the control load. Thus, when using a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29, the setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 is arranged. The setting display unit may be disposed on a substrate common to the substrate.

(Description of the configuration in the other feature and a modification regarding game control)
9 to 21 show display modes of the display monitor 29 in a modification in which setting change processing can be executed during a game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a person in the game arcade or the like, and the switching operation to turn on the lock switch 51 clear switch AK001 When the pressing operation for turning on the is performed, the operation is detected, and the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the setting value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a person in the game arcade or the like while this set value is displayed, the display is displayed on the first display portion 29A each time the operation is detected. The numerical values are updated sequentially and displayed. When the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the setting is displayed on the first display unit 29A as a new setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the operation is detected. , Store in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage).

  The setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a mode that can be changed at the time of power on based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Instead, it may be changeable at the time of power-on, based on detection of at least the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even if there is no detection of the operation to turn on the clear switch AK001 at the time of power on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation to switch the lock switch 51 on. It is also possible to change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the basis of detection of the operation of restoring the stored contents at the time of the power failure and thereafter pressing the clear switch AK001 on. As described above, even if the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not performed by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the power is turned on. Control may be performed to change the set value that has been set.

  When a new set value is stored, the game control data holding area 150 is cleared, thereby saving the special view hold memory, the general drawing hold memory or the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter. Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, etc. may be deleted. Thus, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a pending storage in which the variable display result is a big hit is newly generated along with the change of the setting value, or a normal variable winning prize ball device 6B is newly generated. Can be prevented from opening up (a hit to a common figure will occur), and the fluctuation display result under execution becoming a big hit unreasonably. Furthermore, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big winning opening is closed if a big hit is being played, or the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed if the normally variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profits. Furthermore, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being erased even though the new setting value is not set. In addition, it is not limited to the form which clears pending storage based on the new setting value being set to pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting value which was originally set to pachinko gaming machine 1 was reset. Also in the case, the pending storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the setting value from being properly reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The present invention is not limited to a mode in which the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are closed based on setting of a new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and The first large winning opening or the second large winning opening may be closed when the set value is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the setting value from being properly reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 9-22 show display modes in a modification in which the first display unit 29A capable of displaying setting values on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units including a first display unit 29A to a fifth display unit 29E, and a ratio, a duty ratio, and a base displayed in the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the set value is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the set value of the ratio, combination ratio, and base during display. In FIG. 9-22 (A), the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 displays the ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The display unit does not display the set value.

  FIG. 9-22 (B) shows an example of display control of a ratio, a duty ratio, and a base in the case where the display unit for displaying the setting value is not provided. In this case, the ratio at setting value 1, combination ratio, base is red, combination ratio at setting value 2, combination ratio, base is green, combination ratio at setting value 3, combination ratio, base is blue Display. It is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value by displaying the continuous ratio, the duty ratio, and the base by display colors different according to the set value. Also in this display control example, as in the above embodiment, the ratio display ratio, the duty ratio, and the base at the setting value 1 can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds, and the setting value 1 at the operation of the display switching switch 30 Switching ratio of combination ratio, combination ratio at 5 seconds interval of base to setting ratio 2, combination ratio, combination ratio at base 2 interval of 5 seconds, display ratio of combination ratio 3, combination ratio further , As long as it can be cyclically changed to the switching display at a 5-second interval of the base. Alternatively, the ratio at setting value 1, the ratio at setting value 2, the switching display at intervals of 5 seconds of the ratio at setting value 3, and the ratio at setting value 1, the ratio at setting value 2, the setting value 3 Switching display at 5-second intervals of combination ratio, base at setting value 1, base at setting value 2, and switching display at 5-second intervals of setting value 3 cyclically for each operation of the display switching switch 30 Variations may be possible.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a mode capable of displaying the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value, and the combination ratio according to any one set value of set value 1 to set value 3 and the combination Only ratio and base may be displayed. For example, the ratio, combination ratio, and base are calculated at each of setting value 1 to setting value 3, and among the calculated ratio, combination ratio, and base, the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time is calculated. It is sufficient if only the value etc. can be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, among the calculated ratio, combination ratio, and base, the highest value or the lowest value or the longest or shortest value of the measurement time is set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the operation of the display switching switch 30 The display of the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 has two or more of the ratio, combination ratio, base at set value 1, combination ratio at set value 2, combination ratio, base, and combination ratio at set value 3, combination ratio, base. It is possible to calculate combination ratio, combination ratio and base in set value, and in addition to or instead of combination ratio, combination ratio and base for each set value, combination ratio, combination ratio and base in these two or more set values It may be possible to display on the display monitor 29. As described above, by making it possible to display the continuity ratio, the duty ratio, and the base at two or more setting values on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. In addition, it is not limited to the form which calculates the reciprocity ratio, the duty ratio, and the base which were added together in two or more setting values as composite information, and makes it possible to display on display monitor 29, The average value of the combination ratio and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The display monitor 29 may be able to display only the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base according to the set value that has been set. Further, in the display monitor 29, the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base according to the set value set are displayed as the initial display, and in response to the operation of the display switching switch 30, It may be switched to the display of the ratio, combination ratio, and base. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying numerical values other than the reciprocity ratio, the winning ratio, the base, etc., such as the number of winning balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour) as predetermined information corresponding to the setting value.

  For example, under a specific condition such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, the fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than in a normal time by using a special fluctuation pattern judgment table different from the normal fluctuation pattern judgment table ( For example, a shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily performed. When the variation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is ended according to the set value set, and the determination is switched to the normal determination The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value set is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the 15th variation display after the end of the big hit game, and 16 after the end of the big hit game After the third time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table at the normal time, and when the set value set is 2, the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the 10th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game Determine the fluctuation pattern using the game, and after the end of the big hit game, determine the fluctuation pattern using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, and if the set value is 3, the big hit game The variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the 5th variation display after the end, and after the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation patters in normal times are determined. It may be determined variation pattern using the determination table.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed at step Sa9 in the main processing, or after the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special variation pattern is generated in the first 10 variation When the variable display is executed, it indicates that the setting value (for example, setting value 1) which is advantageous for the player is set, and the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or the pachinko gaming machine is executed. After the set value set to 1 is changed, if the variable display is executed with a special change pattern in the 30th change, a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous for the player is set. Game characteristics that make it possible to focus on whether or not the variable display is executed with a special change pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of variable displays It may be. In addition, when making the pachinko gaming machine 1 such a game characteristic, when the setting value set is 1, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set After the setting value being changed is changed, the rate at which the change is executed with the special change pattern in the first 10th change is the highest, and when the set value being set is 3, the initialization of the RAM 102 ( After the clear) is executed, or after the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the variation is executed with the special variation pattern in the first 10 variation is the lowest And the setting (setting) set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed after initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed only when the setting value set is 1. After, it is sufficient to change at a special variation pattern in the first 30 variation eyes is executed.

  The switching condition (the number of changes before changing the table) for changing the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern from the special change pattern determination table to the change pattern determination table at the normal time differs depending on the set value set. It may be determined by the ratio. By changing the switching condition to switch the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value being set, the determination ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4) decreases. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the above timing, the rendering effect by the fluctuation pattern can be enhanced.

  After initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or after the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the variation display of 100 times is performed, the determination ratio of the variation display of the particular variation pattern (for example, the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach) is normally used for each variation pattern determination table It may be increased or decreased more than when determining the fluctuation pattern. In this case, even if it is determined that the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at different determination rates depending on whether the set value set is 1 or 2 or 3 or 3, respectively. Good. As a result, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or Since the player can focus attention on the variation display count of the variation pattern of the super reach until the variation display of the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, the rendering effect by the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach Can be enhanced. Furthermore, after initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or after the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a variable number of display is performed a predetermined number of times A variation pattern that can be determined only for the time until it is set is provided for each setting value, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed for the player by performing variation display according to the variation pattern according to these setting values. Notification may be possible.

  After initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or after the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the variable display of 100 times) is executed, the proportions of determination of fluctuation patterns other than super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differ according to the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 A variation pattern different from a normal variation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (eg, the variation time is extremely short such as 0.1) The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern or the extremely long fluctuation pattern such as 10 minutes may be different.

  After initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or after the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, the specific period until the variable display of 100 times is performed may indicate the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a rate at which the specific effect is performed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a setting value advantageous to the player, and the setting set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most easily executed, and the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value disadvantageous to the most player In the case of), the high setting value suggestive presentation may be made the hardest to be executed. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach depending on whether or not the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed from when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped last time. The determination rate of the variation pattern may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a definite changing state after the big hit game ends, and the game after the big hit game ends based on the game ball passing the third count switch during the big hit game The state may be controlled to be a positive change state. In this case, as a big hit type, a big hit type that opens the second big winning opening during a big hit game, that is, a big hit type (hereinafter big hit X) in which the game ball can pass the third count switch during a big hit game, Do not open the second big winning opening during the big hit game, that is, provided a big hit type (hereinafter big hit Y) that can not pass the third count switch during the big hit game, the percentage of these big hit X and big hit Y determined May be different depending on the set value. By doing this, it is possible to make the ratio at which the gaming state is controlled to the definite change state different after the big hit game is ended according to the set value that is set, so it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In addition to or instead of the ratio that the variation display result is a big hit, or the determination ratio of the big hit type is different, or instead, the number of winning balls when the gaming ball is won in each winning opening, the large in each round during the big hit game The upper limit number of winnings of the gaming ball to the winning opening may be made to differ according to the set value which is set. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made to differ according to the set value set. As a result, the number of winning balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state can be made different according to the set value, so that it is possible to improve the game interest.

  A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a movable body effect may be performed in which the movable body is operated during a game such as during variable display or during a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, variable prize initialization control such as forward / backward operation check of the restricting member inside the second large winning opening can be performed, and operation check of the movable body and the movable body to the initial position When the movable object initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, pachinko gaming machine The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed when a new set value is set to 1. Thus, new set values can be accurately reflected in the operation of the restricting member and the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main processing. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interruption occurs. When the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing prior to the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be simultaneously started, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended prior to the movable body initialization control. In this way, initialization control related to winning of the game ball can be appropriately performed.

  The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may be different according to the set value set. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is to be the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed in accordance with the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24 show a modification in which the installation position of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 unless the attendant of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3. is there. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting change switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, pachinko at the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 It may be possible to prevent an unauthorized change of the setting value of the gaming machine 1.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 1a. Thus, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 can not be operated. It can be done. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, by separating the security cover 500A from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered by the cover from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover is also pachinko by the security cover 500A from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body forward with the security cover 500A), it is more powerful to change the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of closing the gaming machine frame 3 May be prevented. When the setting changeover switch 52 is substituted by the clear switch AK001, instead of the setting changeover switch 52, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover or a security cover 500A.

  FIGS. 9-25 show a modification in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided slidably in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When closing the gaming machine frame 3, hold the right end of the security cover 500B between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and secure the security cover 500B with the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 It may be made immovable from the state of covering from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be made operable by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is substituted by the clear switch AK001, instead of the setting changeover switch 52, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B.

  FIGS. 9-26 show the modification which provided the security cover so that rotation was possible. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be pivotally supported by a pivot which is provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3 and which is directed in the vertical direction. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is held between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set with the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 and the cover 52 may not be moved from the state of covering from the rear side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be made operable by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is substituted by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered by the security cover 500C instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main substrate 11, the security cover is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the visibility of the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 and the sealing seal is not impeded. It is also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different playability such as a positive variation loop type or a V positive variation type. In the case of a definite variation loop type or a V definite variation type, a function (so-called small hit time) capable of increasing balls by a small hit targeted to open the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game is over You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a small hit time function, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value (for example, for set value 1, the jackpot probability of the normal state is set to 1/200 and the jackpot probability of the probability change state Is set to 1/20, and in the case of setting value 2, by setting the big hit probability in the normal state to 1/300 and setting the big hit probability in the definite change state to 1/30), one set value is set. The first hit probability is easier to enter into the small hit time by being higher than when the other set value is set, but the probability of becoming a big hit during probability change control is also more than when the other set value is set Because it is also high, small hit time is easy to end. That is, when a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing probability variation control is equipped with the function of small hit time, the larger the probability of entering the small hit time is, the higher the set value is set that the big hit probability in the normal state is high. It is difficult for the hit time to continue, and the smaller the probability of entering the small hit time is, the smaller the set value with which the big hit probability in the normal state is low, while the small hit time tends to be continued. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the positive variation loop type and the V positive variation type, not only the range of the game can be expanded by installing the small hit time function, but a set value with a low hit probability is set. Even the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is playing can cause the player to make a will to play a game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of V definite variation type, the opening pattern of the large winning opening for probability variation control determination in the round for probability variation control determination is a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern is easy for the game ball to win the large winning prize opening for probability variation control determination These long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when determined from the short-term opening patterns (opening patterns in which the game ball is hard to win a big winning prize for probability change control). The probability variation probability (percentage of probability variation big hit) may be made to differ by determining at different rates.

  While providing the jackpot determination gate at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, the upper position of the second big winning opening), the game ball passes through the jackpot determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot The random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination may be extracted at the above timing, and a big hit game may be started according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted value of MR2. As described above, when providing the jack for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined at a different ratio according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 rounds of big hit and 4 rounds of big hit are provided as big hit types. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state of the 16 round big hit is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 In the case where 3 is 3, the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state of the 16 round big hit may be made the lowest).

  The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. As described above, when the lock switch 51, the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 51, the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 By providing the glass door frame 3a in the vicinity, it may be made inoperable unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

  What is determined at a different rate according to the set value may be determined as long as it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, such as at least a big hit gaming state, The variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value set. While determining whether or not the variable display result is to be a "big hit" or "small hit" at different rates according to the set value being set, the big hit type at a common rate regardless of the set value being set In the case of determining the fluctuation pattern, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed, so it does not indicate or difficult to indicate the set value to the player or the like. When not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern and the like are determined at a different ratio according to the set value which is set, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern is also changed when the setting value is changed. It is possible to suggest or easily suggest the set value.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11, the CPU 103 executes the main processing with the start of the power supply upon power-on, whereby the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 is performed. Depending on the detection result, control can be performed to any of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permitting state for permitting change of the setting value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value set can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is a state in which the storage content of the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the power failure recovery state, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the content at the time of the power failure.

  FIGS. 9-27 show an example of state control according to switch detection at power-on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, control of the setting change state is performed. In this case, the storage content of the RAM 102 is initialized in step Sa9 of the main processing. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process to make settings. Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the stored content of the RAM 102 is restored to the content at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, whereby the initialization state is established. Control the In this case, since it is determined in step Sa12 of the main processing that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting change processing in step Sa13 is not executed. When the power supply is started, the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off, the stored content of the RAM 102 is restored to the content at the time of the power failure in steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main processing. Control of the power failure recovery state. In this case, since it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. As described above, in conjunction with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations serving as an on / off switching operation or pressing operation by an attendant at a game arcade or the like. The control of the state according to those detection results can be performed.

(Description of the means related to the above-mentioned characteristic part)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, as a pachinko game machine which can set a setting value conventionally, there exist some which are described in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-200902, for example. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a dedicated setting value display unit for displaying the setting value that has been set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that I could not Then, as a game machine of the means 1 concerning the characteristic part which solves this problem,
A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game using gaming media (eg, gaming balls) and capable of controlling in an advantageous state (eg, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of changing the setting of Sa13) that can be set to any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing);
A game where a game value is provided based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first large winning opening, a second large winning opening, etc.) Value giving means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process during the big hit open, etc.),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 29 etc.) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means;
Equipped with
The information display unit can display the set value set by the setting unit (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29)
The gaming machine is described, and according to the means 1, there is no need to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value that has been set, so that the cost increase of the gaming machine is prevented. Can.

As a game machine of means 2 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to the set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a ratio, a winning ratio, a base on the display monitor 29, etc.)
The gaming machine according to the means 1 is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a game machine of means 3 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 has a short-term link ratio, a short-term combination ratio, a total cumulative combination ratio, a total cumulative combination ratio, a base 1, a base 2) For example, parts that are displayed sequentially at intervals of 5 seconds)
The gaming machine according to the means 2 is characterized in that the means 3 makes it easy to grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of the means 4 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each setting value in different display modes (for example, at setting value 1, the ratio, combination ratio, and base are displayed in red, and at setting value 2, the ratio The part ratio, base is displayed in green, and in setting value 3, the ratio of part ratio, part ratio, and base are displayed in blue, etc.)
The gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 3 characterized in the foregoing is described. In this means 4, it is possible to easily grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 5 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
Operation means (for example, display change switch 30 etc.);
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display change switch 30, the ratio of the set value 1, the duty ratio, the base The display changes to setting value 2 ratio, combination ratio, base display, and setting value 2 ratio, combination ratio, base display, setting value 3 ratio, combination ratio, base display Such as switching parts)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4 is described. In this means 5, it is possible to easily grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a game machine of means 6 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
The information display means displays predetermined information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion capable of displaying only a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base according to the set value set) Such)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, the confirmation operation of the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed be able to.

As a game machine of the means 7 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value to be provided by the game value giving means (for example, a ratio (%) of 6,000 CPUs 103, a ratio (%), a ratio of cumulative ratios (%), Part that calculates base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on ratio (%) and last 60000 winning balls, and base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on last 60000 winning balls Etc),
The calculation means can calculate the information individually for each set value (for example, a general winning prize ball, a first starting winning ball, a regular electric winning ball, a special electric winning ball, a total winning ball, The total implantation is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that has been set, such as a portion that can be calculated individually for each set value),
The information display means displays only the information according to any one specific setting value of the setting values (for example, a ratio according to any one setting value of setting value 1 to setting value 3, Role ratio, such as the part that can only display the base)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6 is described. In the means 7, the information confirmation operation can be easily performed.

As a game machine of means 8 of the above-mentioned characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value to be provided by the game value giving means (for example, a ratio (%) of 6,000 CPUs 103, a ratio (%), a ratio of cumulative ratios (%), Part that calculates base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on ratio (%) and last 60000 winning balls, and base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on last 60000 winning balls Etc),
The calculation means can individually calculate the individual information which is the information corresponding to each setting value, and can calculate the composite information which is the information according to two or more different setting values (for example, Repetition ratio, combination ratio, part to calculate the base, etc.) in two or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates a ratio of two or more setting values, a combination ratio, a base, and can be displayed on the display monitor 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7 is described. According to the means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Description of production control regarding other features)
FIG. 9-28 is a flow chart showing an example of effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-mentioned characteristic part. The effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization processing (step AKS011) as the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, the command processing at power on (step Execute AKS012). After executing the command processing at the time of power on, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step AKS013) as in the above embodiment, and if it is off (step AKS013; No), The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly performed and the process waits. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), the effect control process process (Step AKS016) The effect random number updating process (Step AKS017) is sequentially executed.

  FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as command processing at power on. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires, as a reception command, an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 with the start of power supply, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether the received command is a command 9000H which is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If the command is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether the received command is a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If the received command is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether the received command is a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command (step AKS023). If the command is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether the received command is the command 9400H serving as the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS 024; No), the process returns to step AKS 021, and repeatedly executes steps AKS 021 to AKS 024 until the reception command is acquired and waits. If a predetermined error determination time has elapsed without acquiring the reception command, notification that an error of the reception command has occurred may be notified.

  When it is determined in step AKS 023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS 023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS 025). In the game stop state start time process, in response to the game stop state in which the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the progress of effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped. In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for commands other than the setting change end command, the setting is made to invalidate the reception. do it. As a result, for example, various effects associated with the progress of the game may be restricted such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not stopped when the game is stopped corresponding to the setting changed state are not executed. There is a limitation as a range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start process at step AKS025, control to start setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting change notification voice. To control the After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. When the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  If it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. After the control of the setting change notification is finished in this way, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the game stop state end processing, a setting may be made to enable reception of a command from the main board 11 that has been invalidated. As a result, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game can be performed, such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit.

  Thereafter, control to execute initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until the predetermined initialization notification time elapses. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), initialization notification can be performed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation to be the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 with the start of the power supply by power on.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), processing at the start of the game stop state is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS 031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the setting is made to invalidate the reception. do it. As a result, for example, various effects associated with the progress of the game may be restricted such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the gaming stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state is not performed are not executed. There is a limitation as a range or limit.

  After executing the game suspension state start process at step AKS031, control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting confirmation notification voice. To control the In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is started, it is determined whether the setting confirmation is ended (step AKS 033). In step AKS033, when the reception command from the main board 11 is the command 9401H as the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is ended. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation is not ended (step AKS 033; No), step AKS 033 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

  If it is determined in step AKS 033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS 033; Yes), control to end the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS 034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting confirmation notification screen in the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. Thus, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is ended, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game can be performed, such as variable display of the effect design and effect display during the big hit.

  Thereafter, control may be performed to execute a power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the power failure recovery notification voice. Control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), a power failure recovery notification may be made executable. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure, in response to the case where the operation to depress the clear switch AK001 is not detected along with the start of power supply by power on. Good.

  FIG. 9-30 shows the priority of control in the present embodiment regarding notification by ontology control, screen display and the like. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state along with the start of the power supply by the power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the gaming stop state to stop the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop state start time process in step AKS025 and step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting check end command is invalidated, and control is performed so that control relating to normal effects is not performed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is for the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set as a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable presence / absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by the RTC. The priority AKP03 such as magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, and therefore lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to effect control, so the priority lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen of the power saving function and the like. If the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 or if the setting change notification or the setting confirmation is ended, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position. Even if it does, the display of the setting screen of the power saving function etc. by switching the output amount changeover switch is not started. In this way, the display regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen or the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount of output or output control such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, since the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value.

(Description of the modification regarding effect control in other feature parts)
9-31 is a flow chart showing an example of effect control main processing that is executed in a modification in which the setting confirmation processing can be executed during the game. The setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the setting value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a staff at the game arcade and the switching operation to turn on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 displays the setting value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. This display is not changed even if the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a person in charge at the game arcade or the like, and becomes a display for confirming the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1 There is. When execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the main substrate 11 transmits a setting confirmation start command to the effect control substrate 12 And a command 9400H is sent. When the execution of the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modification, after the effect random number updating process is performed in step AKS017, the on-going setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is performed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step AKS01A as the setting confirmation process in progress. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting confirmation in which the set value being set is displayed in a checkable manner on the display monitor 29 is being confirmed (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, after the control in step AKS058 is performed, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed in a period until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting confirmation is not in progress (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress in the period from the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, In the other period, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the setting confirmation flag in progress is set to the on state (step AKS054). The ongoing setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or after the on-going setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, customer waiting transmitted from main substrate 11 It is determined whether or not a demo specification command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if there is no reception of the customer waiting demo specification command (Step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is ended.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that a customer waiting demo specification command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, if the setting confirmation flag in progress is on (step AKS056; Yes), the setting confirmation flag in progress is cleared to be in the off state (step AKS057), and control to start setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed. Thus, when the setting confirmation start command is received during the progress of the game, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demo specification command.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that setting confirmation is in progress (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the setting value set is displayed on the display monitor 29 by executing such an ongoing setting confirmation process, the effect control board 12 side, After receiving the customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value by preventing the effect being performed from being canceled.

  When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game on the side of the main board 11, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command is enabled. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demo specification command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demo specification command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during game transmission is transmitted, and the setting value is set after the progress of the game is ended. It may be possible to control the state in which it is possible to confirm

  Alternatively, the set value that has been set is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to perform display corresponding to the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game, the main board 11 does not transmit a setting confirmation start command or the like to the effect control board 12, and a display capable of confirming the setting value on the display monitor 29 is displayed. Control to start may be performed. In this case, in the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game continues.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executable. For example, in the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS028 ends the setting change notification, and the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period is ended. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS 034 ends the setting confirmation notification, and the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period is ended. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen or the output of the setting change notification voice, or instead of a part or all of the game effect lamp 9, a part or all of the light emitting members or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed to cause an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the above to emit light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice, or in place of a part or all, a part of the game effect lamp 9 instead of a part or all of the game effect lamp 9 Alternatively, control may be performed to cause any light emitting member such as all light emitting members or a notification light provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. Thus, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be changed using an arbitrary rendering device or a notification device different from the rendering device. In the setting confirmation notification, notification that the set value can be confirmed may be performed using an arbitrary rendering device or a notification device different from the rendering device. The present invention is not limited to the configuration change notification and the configuration confirmation notification being performed, and one or both of the configuration change notification and the configuration confirmation notification may not be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to a mode in which a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command and a 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command are prepared. A common setting end command is used as a setting change end command and a setting confirmation end command. It may be In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is ended when the setting end command is received, and the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received in step AKS033. Then, it may be determined.

(Description about feature part 71AK)
9-33 shows the example of a structure of output amount change-over switch 71AK001 provided in the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 regarding characteristic part 71AK of a present Example. The output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be provided on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in the substrate case accommodating the effect control substrate 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch switching operation for initializing a predetermined effect output and the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when the staff of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, in the output amount switching switch 71AK001, opening the gaming machine frame 3 is a condition that makes it possible to change the initial setting of the effect output. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initializes the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, in accordance with the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, whether the change adjustment of the effect output by the player is permitted or inhibited is switched using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating the setting of such effect output in a predetermined area or the like of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 9-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and by turning the knob 71AK002, the channel is turned to the channel. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of six levels depending on whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the volume adjustment by the player is performed. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the CPU for effect control 120 directly or through a predetermined circuit, and the changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the CPU for effect control 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be identified.

  FIG. 9-34 shows initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R is in accordance with "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to “97.0”, and is controlled to allow (allow) volume setting (adjustment) by the player. The output amount of any rendering device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 is not limited to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, as long as the output amount of any rendering device can be initialized according to the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “6” to “F”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited), so effects are output by the effect output initially set. Is executed. Further, in response to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 being "F", the power saving function setting screen can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the presence or absence and type of power saving function (power saving mode) The RTC 126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to adjustment of the effect output is received by the knob 71AK002, based on the detection of the operation to switch the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages is executed based on a switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001.

  9 to 35 show examples of execution of setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification with respect to the characteristic part 71AK. In this execution example, the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5 as the setting change notification as shown in FIG. 9-35A, and the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic part 71AK, in the same manner as the above embodiment, the command processing at power on is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing. In the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control at step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control at step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS 032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS 034. Furthermore, by the control in step AKS 030, initialization notification is started along with the start of the initialization notification period, and initialization notification is ended along with the end of the initialization notification period. The setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to the mode in which the display area of the effect display device 5 is displayed entirely, and a part of the display area of the effect display device 5 It may be an aspect displayed on.

  The characteristic part 71AK is configured to include the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform initial setting of rendering output such as volume as one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the voice output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. It may be output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 in which a message "setting change in progress" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 in which a message "setting confirmation in progress" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, an initialization notification sound 71AKE03 in which a message of "initialized" is notified is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  As described above, according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01, notification is performed with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to adjustment of rendering output. . Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, notification may be performed as the output of the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 with the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of presentation output. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed along with the change and confirmation of the setting value and the initialization (clearing) of the storage content in the RAM 102.

  9 to 36 show display examples when the player's volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the feature portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output is not adjusted by the player yet, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 9-36 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images indicating six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and makes the display color of each memory different according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red) while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white) . At this time, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2" in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, and the first on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increase the display color memory by one. As described above, each time a first operation of tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (such as rightward) is detected, effects are produced in multiple stages until the setting of the effect output reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed so as to increase one step at a time. On the other hand, every time the second operation of tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount is divided into multiple stages until the setting of the effect output reaches the minimum. It may be changed to decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. 9-36 (B) has shown the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display apparatus 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function, and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, a person in charge at the game arcade detects the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, whether or not there is a power saving function (power saving mode), And, setting (changing) of a value indicating the current date and time by the RTC 126 is executed. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 and the detection of the operation for changing each setting. For example, when "power saving mode A" is set on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only when the customer is waiting for a demonstration where the demonstration screen display is performed. What is to be done is fine. In addition, when “power saving mode B” is set on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is also added during the waiting for customer demonstration and during the execution of the variable display. Any control may be performed as long as control is performed to activate the power saving function, such as reducing (the amount of light emission).

  9 to 37 are flowcharts showing an example of effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic part 71AK. This effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic part 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step 71AKS011) and a power-on command process (step 71AKS012) as in the above embodiment. The initialization process at step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process at step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power on command process at step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power on procedure at step AKS012 in the above embodiment If it is After executing the power-on command processing at step 71AKS012, the start-time output switching process (step AKS013) is executed unlike the above embodiment. After that, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014), and if it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. To wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), command analysis processing (step 71AKS016), effect control process processing (Step 71 AKS 017) The effect random number updating process (Step 71 AKS 018) is sequentially executed. Furthermore, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 71AK, the in-progress output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS013 as the start output switching process. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether the specified switch position is “F” (step 71 AKS 032). Then, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the rendering output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and output at the start End the switching process. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control to start setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to display the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 on the effect display device 5 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like. After the control for setting the power saving function and the like is started in this manner, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), the corresponding control is performed during setting of the power saving function (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to detection of an operation for tilting the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A, detection of an operation for pressing the push button 31B, etc. As long as the control is done

  If it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control to end the setting of the power saving function is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start output switching process is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control stores power saving function data indicating the presence or absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 9-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the output change process in progress. In the ongoing output change process, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the effect output using the output amount switching switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the switching permission condition may be established. When such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switching signal from the output amount switching switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated by the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position identified from the changeover switch signal, and the comparison result does not match. It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether the switch position after the change is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control to start setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same process as steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the start output switching process may be executed. That is, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and if not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the corresponding control is performed during setting of the power saving function (step 71AKS058), step 71AKS057 Return to Thereafter, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control to end the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS058).

  If the switch permission condition is not satisfied at step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), or if the switch position is not changed at step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or control is performed at step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After the change, it is determined based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 whether the player can adjust the volume or the like (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, in the case where the current switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of “0” to “5”, the player can set (adjust) the sound volume setting (adjustment). It may be determined that adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is not possible (prohibited) (step 71 AKS060; No), the on-going output change process is ended. The present invention is not limited to the one that determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the player can adjust (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a detection of an operation to change the output amount of effect (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, while the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, detection of an operation for changing the effect output amount in multiple stages is performed based on the detection result of the operation for operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It may be determined whether or not there is. When such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the in-progress output change process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the in-progress output change process is ended. In step 71AKS062, when the operation for pressing the push button 31B is detected in the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the volume setting etc. after change is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 You should do it.

(Description of Modification Example of Feature 71AK)
FIGS. 9-40 show the priority of control regarding notification by an effect control, screen display, etc. in the modification of the characteristic part 71AK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is controlled to the setting change state along with the start of the power supply by the power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the gaming stop state where the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. On the other hand, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state along with the start of the power supply by the power-on, the game may not be stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 is configured not to execute the game stop state start process in the step AKS031 of the command processing at power on, and in the case of the setting confirmation state, for example, the output amount switch 71AK001 The input of a changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function and the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification has a lower priority than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function and the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification, the setting screen of the power saving function, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71 AKP 12 and the priority AKP 13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, since the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function, etc., when control to start the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the command processing at power on. Even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” before the setting change ends, the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 is not started. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen of the power saving function etc., when control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the command processing at power on. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation ends, power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed when changing the setting value, while the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be performed when confirming the setting value. . Thereby, when preventing a change in the setting value from being disturbed, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect together with the confirmation of the setting value.

  By executing command processing at power on in step 71AKS012 and then executing start output switching processing in step 71AKS013, detection of an operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to a mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, and whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected by the command processing at power on If the operation is detected, information indicating the switch position can be identified is stored, and control of the output amount of the effect is executed based on the stored information after the setting change state ends. It may be For example, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is not ended in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the identification result of the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start output switching process, the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be identified based on the information indicating the identification result of the switch position. Also in this case, when in the setting change state, the control of the output amount of the effect can be restricted not to be executed regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, when in the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a specific switch position, for example, whether the switch position is “F” or not. Instead of the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5, the control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority. In this case, when the setting change notification is finished by the control in step AKS028 of the command processing at the time of power on, the control to display setting change notification screen 71AKD01 which has been given priority on the effect display device 5 is also finished. It is sufficient if the display of the power saving function setting screen 71 AKD 12 can be started on the display device 5.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting a predetermined operation of the player is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. It is also good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as switching operation or pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value change switch. The setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the same as when the clear switch AK001 detects an operation.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic part 71AK, after the power-on command processing is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, for example, in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031, a game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting check end command is invalidated, and control is performed so that control relating to normal effects is not performed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, and the adjustment output of the rendering output according to the switch position and the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). Thus, when control is made in the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect The execution of control to switch the initial setting of the output amount of is restricted (prohibited). As a result, since control for changing the setting value is prioritized over control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the knob 71AK002 accepts an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of effect. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, the initial setting of the output amount of an effect can be switched appropriately. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the effect control main processing of the characteristic part 71AK, after executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012, the start output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the start output switching process at step 71AKS013, at step 71AKS033, control is performed to switch the initial setting of rendering output according to the switch position, or at step 71AKS034 to 71AKS037, control is performed to set a power saving function and the like. Thus, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if there is detection of an operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, the initial setting of the output amount of an effect can be switched appropriately. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 does not matter the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. , The pachinko gaming machine 1 is output at the maximum volume that can be output. As described above, in the case where it is prevented that trouble occurs in the change of the set value by notifying by the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the fraudulent act Can also be prevented. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic part 71AK)
With regard to the above-described characterizing portion 71AK, there is a gaming machine which can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a gaming machine which can change the setting regarding an effect, there exists some which are described, for example in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-29614. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2015-29614 do not consider control when changing the setting of the effect while changing a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage. The Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means along with the start of the power supply;
Detecting means for effect adjustment (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of effect;
Output amount control means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the ongoing output change process at step 71AKS019) which controls the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means. Such as the CPU 120 for effect control to be executed),
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means when in the change permission state (for example, as command processing at power on of step 71AKS012 of step AKS012 And (e.g., a CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing)
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since execution of control by the output amount control means is limited when in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the setting value changing operation.

As a game machine of the means 2 concerning the characteristic part 71AK,
Effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control etc.) which controls execution of the effect according to progress of a game,
And an effect control board (for example, effect control board 12 etc.) provided with the effect control means,
The effect control board further includes receiving means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) for receiving an operation detectable by the effect adjustment detection means,
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 concerning the characteristic part 71AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the change operation of the setting value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 71AK,
When the output adjustment control unit detects the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit before the change permission state ends, the output amount control unit operates the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit after the change permission state ends. Control to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the start output switching process in step 71AKS013, etc.),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the setting value changing operation while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a game machine of the means 4 concerning the characteristic part 71AK,
Different from the operation during the game by the player, it comprises an initialization detection means (for example, a clear switch AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
When in the change permission state, the setting value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52) ),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value without providing a separate configuration for changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 5 which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK,
It comprises change notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for giving notification regarding the change of the setting value by the setting means, and
The change notification unit performs notification (for example, output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01) with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the setting value from being disturbed while preventing the setting value from being changed due to a wrongdoing.

As a game machine of the means 6 which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002);
The output amount control means
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the setting screen of the power saving function etc. higher than the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification) Priority 71AKP12 etc),
While in the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit is not controlled (for example, priority of setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen etc. 71 AKP11 etc),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic part 71AK characterized in that may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect together with the confirmation of the set value, but when the set value is changed, the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled. It can prevent that a trouble arises.

(Description of feature part 72AK)
FIG. 9-41 shows an example of execution of the power-on operation by the movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member to be a first movable effect device and a second movable member to be a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops with the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After moving upward from the retracted position to the upper right and stopping at the advanced position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect is performed to return to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a pivoting mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a sliding mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotation mechanism. The first to third division pieces form a predetermined figure at this time with the united closed state as the origin position. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces can not be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is laterally slid by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member takes the pivoting mechanism and the first to third split pieces as the origin position when the first movable member is at the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5 and the left side of the effect display device 5 It should just be able to slide between the position and the right side position.

  The second movable member stops the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the home position (retracted position). After having descended from the retracted position and stopped at the advanced position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK 014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the display screen central portion of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. As described above, the second movable member performs an effect operation that simply reciprocates up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK 014.

  In the rotation mechanism of the first movable member, the origin position is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. In the slide mechanism of the first movable member, the origin position is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that allows the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the home position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that allows the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state of the home position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that allows the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left position or the right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that allows the second movable member to move between the home position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of effects accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal rendering operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal rendering operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member or the second movable member to the original position.

  When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as indicated by the solid line arrow 72KM01, the pivoting mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the home position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. From the center to the overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen in the effect display device 5. Subsequently, as indicated by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state of the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as indicated by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction After returning to the home position. Then, as indicated by the solid-line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the home position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the home position (retraction position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 and then returned to the home position (retraction position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member can not be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, operations indicated by solid arrows 72 AKM 01 and 72 AKM 07 are required. Further, in the long initial operation, the movement of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member is performed so that the movement amount becomes larger than the operations shown by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved such that the amount of movement is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved to the closed state which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. Thereafter, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01, 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is temporarily turned off after turning off. The motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member may be moved as indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so as to turn off the origin sensor AK024 and then turn it on.

  9-42 show control patterns used to drive the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a rendering operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a rendering operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first effect performed along with the progress of the game, such as reach effect, for example. The effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second effect different from the first effect performed along with the progress of the game, for example, the advance effect. . In addition, as a control pattern of a movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, and some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive content of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121 and control the operation of the movable member.

  9 to 43 are flowcharts showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 according to the characterizing portion 72AK of this embodiment. This power-on command process may be performed at step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the CPU for effect control 120 determines the received command from the main substrate 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005), as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  Unlike the above embodiment, after the control in step 72AKS006, the control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS 007, it is possible to perform control to execute the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when in the setting change state as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control in step 72AKS007, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS010, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), unlike the above embodiment, and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation of the movable member, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, when the setting change state as the change permitted state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation. It is possible not to perform control. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continued and the short initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period ends.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012) and control to subsequently execute the long initial operation (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is finished, the control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 are executed, and when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed to execute the operation. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continued and the short initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period ends. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Thereafter, control is performed to execute initialization notification (step 72AKS014). The control to execute the long initialization operation may be performed after the control to execute the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control may be performed to execute initialization notification before control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS015), and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, control to execute the return operation to return the movable member to the origin position It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continued and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed until the short initial operation period ends.

  Following the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended, as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), control to end the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control to execute the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS 021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ended, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS 021, the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform control to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS 021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is ended, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and control to subsequently execute the long initial operation (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing ends. In step 72AKS023, after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 ends, control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 72AKS 022 and 72AKS 023 are executed to perform the initial operation following the short initial operation, which is the return operation, when the control of the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state. Control can be performed to execute the operation. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS 023 may be continued and the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period is completed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Description of the modification regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 9-44 is a flow chart showing an example of power-on command processing executed in a variation of the characteristic part 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), and control to execute the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform control to execute initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the memory content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized (cleared) along with the start of the power supply due to power on. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is performed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 can be executed to perform control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation. . In addition, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in step 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, and then the short circuit will be the return operation. Following the initial operation, control can be performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. Control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be a power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), and control to execute the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing ends. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command, the stored content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the stored content at the time of the power failure with the start of power supply by power on. . When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to perform control to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. it can. In addition, even after executing the game stop state end processing at step 72AKS020, the control at step 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to confirm the setting for confirming the setting value set at the pachinko gaming machine 1 After the state ends, control can be performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. As described above, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery notification command, and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. Control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled as the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled even if the initialization notification is not performed. In addition, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled as the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be controlled even if the power failure recovery notification is not performed. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the return operation condition is satisfied. After the control for executing the effect according to the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. In the effect accompanying the progress of the game, any operation can be performed according to a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily designated according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the setting change state in which the setting value change in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted is controlled with the start of power supply by turning on the power, movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member Control to execute the return operation to return to is performed. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the change work of the set value and the like is not hindered by the movable member, the change work of the set value Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, and the short initial operation becomes the return operation. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is performed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be impeded, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control to execute the long initial operation after completion of the setting change state is performed, and control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is in effect. As described above, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, the long initial operation as the initial operation by the movable member is not performed, and the setting value changing operation is not hindered. It is possible to prevent problems in changing the value. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control to execute the long initial operation is performed in step 72AKS011. Thus, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. As a result, when preventing the setting value changing operation from being disturbed, unnecessary operation of the movable member can be prevented, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic part 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, and the return operation is performed. Following the short initial operation, control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72 AKS 014 is performed to perform control to execute initialization notification. In this way, with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, when the initialization regarding control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by the storage contents in the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the initialization notification When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation as an initial operation following the short initial operation as a return operation. Take control. As a result, in the case of preventing problems in the setting value changing operation, it is possible to share the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control to execute a short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member Control to execute the return operation to return to is performed. Thereafter, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is ended, control to execute the long initial operation is performed in step 72AKS021. Thus, after the setting confirmation state ends, control is performed to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be interrupted, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control is performed to execute the long initial operation after the setting confirmation state ends, and control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is in effect. Thereby, in order to prevent problems in the setting value changing operation, the setting value can be easily confirmed by preventing the long initial operation as the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state. Let's do it. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic part 72AK)
Conventionally, as the above-mentioned characteristic part 72AK, as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. Moreover, as a game machine which returns a movable member to an origin position, there exists some which are described, for example in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154, the case where the change in setting and the operation of the movable member compete with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
Movable control means (for example, step) capable of executing at least control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the home position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member And CPU for effect control that executes command processing at power-on of the AKS 012),
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when in the change permitted state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is performed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 2 which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK,
The movable control means is
When not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013);
When in the change permitted state, control to execute the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characterizing portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed by preventing the movable member from executing the initial operation when in the change permission state.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the characterizing portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the useless operation of the movable member and to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 4 concerning the characteristic part 72AK,
Initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and step 72AKS014 for executing the execution control) when initialization of the gaming machine is performed along with the start of power supply Etc),
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014);
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following step 72AKS005 to 72AKS010);
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the characterizing portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, the operation by the movable members can be made common to reduce the control load, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 5 which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002);
The movable control means is
When in the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017);
Control is performed to execute the initial operation after the setting confirmation state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS021),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 72AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the movable member from executing the initial operation when in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value.

(Description of feature portion 73AK)
FIGS. 9-45 is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation performed by CPU120 for production control regarding characteristic part 73AK of a present Example. This power-on command process may be performed at step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. Also in the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as that of the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 73AK, the CPU for effect control 120 determines a received command from the main substrate 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) as in the above embodiment (step 73AKS005). Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS 007; No), step 73AKS 007 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed in the setting change state as the change permitted state. .

  If it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes) or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. Then (step 73AKS010), control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends, control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 are performed, and when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial operation becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed. In addition, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state ends. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state ends, the long initial becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed to execute the operation.

  Thereafter, control is performed to execute initialization notification (step 73AKS012). The control to execute the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control to execute the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, after performing control to execute the short initial operation, control to execute initialization notification may be performed, and then control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS013), as in the above embodiment. Control to start notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS015). Step 73AKS015 executes the control to execute the return operation to return the movable member to the home position when in the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continued and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed until the short initial operation period ends.

  Following the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is ended (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016; Yes), control to end the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. Step 73AKS019 is executed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation of the movable member, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is finished. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. It is possible not to perform control to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is ended, and control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control to execute the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and control to subsequently execute the long initial operation (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing ends. In step 73AKS021, after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 ends, control to execute the long initial operation may be started. Steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021 are executed, and when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, the long initial becomes the initial operation following the short initial operation that becomes the return operation. Control can be performed to execute the operation. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS 021 may be continued and the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed until the long initial operation period is completed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the feature portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature portion 72AK.

  9 to 46 show a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the characteristic part 73AK. In the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message of “setting confirmation in progress” is displayed, and a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of setting values may be accumulated on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing setting value information together with RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the setting values may be stored in the predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory or the like) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, when the setting value information is stored together with the RTC information in the backup area in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 when the setting value history is transmitted, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. The power supply on the side of the effect control board 12 by transmitting from the main substrate 11 to the effect control board 12 a setting value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the setting value. It may be made identifiable with the start of the

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of setting values is grasped It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed to move the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable state Control is performed to execute a short initial operation which is a return operation for returning the member to the home position. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. The staff of the game arcade can easily grasp the history of setting values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When this is the case, control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed in the setting confirmation state, while the long initial as the initial operation. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game arcade can easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of the set value from being difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  In addition, even when controlled to the setting change state, a history of setting values may be displayed. In this case, in the setting change state as the change permission state, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the home position. As described above, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, and the set value is set. The history of can be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 73AKS010. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, control to execute the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is ended. Thus, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not performed, and therefore the change operation of the set value is not disturbed by the return operation. It is possible to prevent the trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is finished, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to perform control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation. As described above, since control is performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the movable state is prevented in order to prevent trouble in the setting value changing operation. An operation to return the member appropriately to the home position is possible.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation which becomes the return operation. Subsequently, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform control to execute initialization notification. In this way, with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, when the initialization regarding control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by the storage contents in the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the initialization notification When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the long initial operation as an initial operation following the short initial operation as a return operation. Take control. As a result, in the case of preventing problems in the setting value changing operation, it is possible to share the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a history of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command, control to execute a short initial operation is performed in step 73AKS015. In this manner, when the display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73 AKD 01 which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of setting values is being executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation which is a return operation. Thus, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped in the case of preventing the setting value changing operation from being disturbed. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

  Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H as the setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H as the RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H as the power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H as the setting confirmation start command. In this way, when control is made in the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, a command as information different from that in the case of not being controlled in the setting change state is transmitted Be done. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, the control burden regarding presentation can be reduced. Therefore, appropriate change of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic portion 73AK)
Conventionally, regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 73AK, as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Moreover, as a game machine which returns a movable member to an origin position, there exists some which are described, for example in Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-221154, the case where the change in setting and the operation of the movable member compete with each other has not been considered. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Movable members operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK01 1 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK 014, etc.);
A movable control unit capable of executing at least control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position (for example, CPU 120 for effect control for executing command processing at the time of power on of step AKS012);
The movable control means is
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010);
When in the change permitted state, control to execute the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009),
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not performed when the change permission state is in effect, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 2 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the characterizing portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to operate the movable member appropriately and prevent troubles in changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
When initialization of the gaming machine is performed along with the start of power supply, initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and step 73AKS012 for executing presentation notification) are executed. Etc),
The movable control means is
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012);
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following step 73AKS005 to 73AKS009);
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 73AK characterized in that.
In such a configuration, the operation by the movable members can be made common to reduce the control load, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 4 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
A setting display unit (such as the effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit;
The setting display unit can display a history of setting values set by the setting unit in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01);
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being performed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 73AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being performed, the initial operation by the movable member is prevented from being performed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and trouble occurs in the setting value changing operation. Can be prevented.

As a game machine of the means 5 concerning the characteristic part 73AK,
It comprises effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control etc which executes command analysis processing of AKS015 etc) which controls execution of the effect on the basis of the information from the aforementioned game control means,
The game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) different from when not being controlled to the change permission state when being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of power supply. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 73AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by the effect control means and to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

(Description of the characteristic part 74AK)
9 to 47 show configuration examples of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect regarding the characterizing portion 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74 AKP 01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic part 74AK is the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. It includes confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors incorporated in the operating lever (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating a confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00. For example, an initial value of a confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, and second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the wrapper twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound which outputs the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors incorporated in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 matches, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matching determination values By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to execute output of confirmation sound and confirmation vibration.

  In addition, while the confirmation effect is being performed, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L ends, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R is started. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is finished, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A is finished and the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect is finished. In the confirmation effect, after power supply is started by turning on the power in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a confirmation effect condition is satisfied by detecting an operation of pressing the push button 31B within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period. Execution is started. Among the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by any of the confirmation vibrations by the vibration motor built in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is performed, the control may be performed so as not to perform another effect. As described above, it is easily understood by the game arcade staff or the like whether or not the effects using the respective rendering devices can be normally executed by the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration being executed at mutually different timings. Can.

  FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic part 74AK. This effect control main process may be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the CPU for effect control 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) as in the above embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. If it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed and the process waits. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), the command analysis process (step 74AKS015), the effect control process process (Step 74AKS016) The effect random number updating process (Step 74AKS017) is sequentially executed. Furthermore, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, after the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 9: is a flowchart which shows an example of the process performed in step 74AKS018 as a confirmation production control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS 031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, initialization notification is started by performing control in step AKS 030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS 031 is performed first, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control is performed to start the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with a lapse of a predetermined confirmation reception time, such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of initialization notification is not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether it is a confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). If the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032 or if it is determined that the confirmation acceptance period is in step 74AKS033 (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not variable display is started (step 74 AKS 034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control is performed to cancel the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. As described above, when the variable display is started when the confirmation acceptance period is in progress, the confirmation acceptance period is stopped to limit the confirmation effect condition not to be satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap, and the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the start of variable display is not determined (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation detection for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if the operation is not detected (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set to the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set so that the determination of the timer value is performed (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that motion has been detected and settings for executing the confirmation effect are performed, control may be performed to end the confirmation acceptance period.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that the confirmation acceptance period is not in progress (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether a confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer is started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether or not variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the start of the variable display (step 74AKS041; Yes), the control to cancel the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, by stopping the execution of the confirmation effect, control is performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. The confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the start of variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether a timeout of the confirmation effect process timer has occurred (step 74AKS044). At this time, if timeout has occurred (step 74AKS 044; Yes), control to end the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-out has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value is met (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is ended.

  FIGS. 9-50 are timing diagrams etc. which show the example of control of a confirmation production regarding the characteristic part 74AK. In FIG. 9-50 (A), when power supply is started by turning on the power, while there is detection of an operation of pressing clear switch AK001, there is no detection of an operation of switching lock switch 51 to ON. Corresponding to the case where the setting change state is not controlled. In FIG. 9-50 (B), when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is detection of an operation of pressing clear switch AK001 and detection of an operation of switching lock switch 51 to ON. Shows a case where control is performed in the setting change state. FIG. 9-50 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

  In the case of not being controlled to the setting change state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT01, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. . In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS 021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control in step AKS 030 is performed, and initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of initialization notification is started, and the control of step 74AKS032 starts the confirmation acceptance period. Ru. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT03 in the confirmation detection period, it is determined in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected, and the confirmation effect control process The control to execute the confirmation effect such as step 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 of is started. In this way, when control for executing the confirmation effect is started, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, whereby the confirmation effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is controlled to the setting change state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed due to the determination that the received command is the setting change start command in step AKS023, the control of step AKS026 is performed. The setting change notification is started. At this time, other than when the setting change end command is received, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification or the like is not started. Thereafter, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received at timing 74AKT13, it is determined in step AKS027 of the power-on command processing that the setting change is ended, and subsequent to steps AKS028 and AKS029. , And control of step AKS 030 is performed, and initialization notification is started.

  Thus, when initialization notification by control of step AKS 030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in confirmation effect control processing of step 74AKS018 included in effect control main processing of characteristic part 74AK, initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031. It is determined that the start of the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control at step 74AKS 032. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation acceptance period, it is determined in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected, and the confirmation effect control process The control to execute the confirmation effect such as step 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 of is started. In this way, when control for executing the confirmation effect is started, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, whereby the confirmation effect is ended.

  In addition, the effects included in the confirmation effect may be effects using any of the effect devices provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor incorporated in the operating lever (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor incorporated in the push button 31B May be implemented.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the command processing upon power-on is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, for example, in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031, a game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting check end command is invalidated, and control is performed so that control relating to normal effects is not performed. In this case, control to execute the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control to execute initialization notification is performed. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later, and the confirmation effect is displayed. Control to be executed. In this way, when the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted is controlled along with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control to execute the confirmation effect is not performed. As a result, since control for changing the setting value is prioritized over control for executing the confirmation effect, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed according to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, after the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Do. As a result, in the case of preventing a problem in changing the setting value, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed to become a confirmation acceptance period, and thereafter it is determined that the start operation is detected in step 74AKS036, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . As a result, in the case of preventing a problem in changing the setting value, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  When the confirmation effect control process is executed at step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control at step 74AKS032 is executed, whereby the memory contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. If the setting confirmation state is completed, the confirmation acceptance period is the same as when the setting confirmation state is ended. Control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, when preventing that a change work of a setting value arises, control about execution of confirmation production can be made common, and the control burden of confirmation production can be reduced. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic part 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 to enable the control of outputting the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes the output of the sound for confirmation by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means. As a result, in the case of preventing a problem in changing the setting value, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed. Therefore, appropriate setting of setting values is possible.

(Description of means related to the characteristic portion 74AK)
Conventionally, as the above-mentioned characteristic part 74AK, as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2016-220833 A, consideration is not given to the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation are in competition. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of changing the setting value to a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent a problem in changing the setting value.
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means capable of executing effects (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.);
Confirmation control means capable of executing control of confirmation effect by the effect means on the basis of satisfaction of the confirmation effect condition after power supply is started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) Equipped with
The confirmation control means
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition when not controlled to the change permission state with the start of the power supply (for example, step AKS021, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of AKS030, etc. ),
When the change permission state is set, the control to execute the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029),
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed when the change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 2 which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS025 to AKS030, etc. ),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the characterizing portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

As a game machine of the means 3 concerning the characteristic part 74AK,
A game detection means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player is provided.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the detection means for gaming when it is a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036, etc.)
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characterizing part 74AK characterized by the above.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

As a game machine of the means 4 which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK,
When the confirmation control means is initialized without being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of the power supply, the confirmation effect condition of the confirmation effect condition in the common confirmation acceptance period when the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characterizing part 74AK.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect can be made common, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the setting value.

As a game machine of the means 5 which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK,
And sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting an effect sound,
The confirmation effect includes the output of a sound for confirmation by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characterizing part 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect to prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

(Description of the feature portion 75AK)
FIG. 9-51 is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of the power activation performed by CPU120 for production control regarding characteristic part 75AK of a present Example. The power-on command process may be performed at step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature portion 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 75AK, the CPU for effect control 120 determines a received command from the main substrate 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed as in the above embodiment (step 75AKS005) to change the setting. Control to start notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). When the setting change is not finished (step 75AKS 007; No), unlike the above embodiment, after the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), the process returns to step 75AKS 007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, by executing the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008, the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply. When it happens, control for performing confirmation production can be performed. If it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control to end the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

  If it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes) or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. Then (step 75AKS011), the power-on command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), End the power on command processing. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of the power supply, the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of step 75AKS008 is executed while the setting confirmation state is set. When it is controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during setting change is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect is performed in the setting change state, the control for enabling the confirmation effect is not performed in the setting confirmation state.

  FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step 75AKS008 as confirmation effect control process during setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a confirmation effect has been made (step 75AKS 031). In step 75AKS 031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been made. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been made in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the process of confirming effect during the setting change ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been made (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether a confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). If there is no motion detection at step 75AKS 033 (step 75AKS 033; No), the setting change confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that motion has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read out as a setting for starting execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initial A value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and a first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). As described above, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, the determination of step 75AKS 033 is performed. Therefore, in the setting change state as the change permission state, any setting period is not provided such as the confirmation reception period. By detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B at the timing or the like, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), the update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038) ). At this time, if timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control to end the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-out has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is met (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is ended.

  FIG. 9-53 is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of a confirmation production regarding the characteristic part 75AK. In FIG. 9-53 (A), when power supply is started by turning on the power, while there is detection of an operation of pressing clear switch AK001, there is no detection of an operation of switching lock switch 51 to ON. Corresponding to the case where the setting change state is not controlled. In FIG. 9-53 (B), when power supply is started by turning on the power, there is detection of an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and detection of an operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON. Shows a case where control is performed in the setting change state. FIG. 9-53 (C) shows control contents at each timing.

  When not controlled to the setting change state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case where the setting change state is not controlled by the characteristic part 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. Thus, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at timing 75AKT03 in the confirmation acceptance period, the control to execute the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. A plurality of types of effects, which become first to third confirmation effects, are sequentially executed using. After that, when the timing 75AKT04 comes, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when control is performed to the setting confirmation state when power supply is started by turning on the power at timing 75AKT11, the setting change is performed at timing 75AKT12 unlike when control is performed to the setting change state by the characteristic part 74AK. Since the start command has been received, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is the setting change start command. Thus, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is ended in step 75AKS007. If not ended at this time, the confirmation effect control process during setting change is executed in step 75AKS008. Ru. In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic part 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start operation has been detected. Thus, in the setting change state as the change permitted state, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting an operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. The control to execute the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change is started. Thus, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 and the like included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be performed as the first to third confirmation effects are executed in order. Thereafter, when the timing 75AKT14 comes, the confirmation effect ends.

  After the timing 75AKT14 is reached, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in the step 75AKS007 that the setting change is ended. Thus, following the steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of the step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, as in the case of the characteristic part 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. Just do it. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in the confirmation reception period, the control to execute the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the detection of the start operation is performed in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition, and control to execute the confirmation effect is performed. In this way, when control is made in the setting change state in which the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is permitted along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, control to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state as the change permission state is, by making the confirmation effect executable, the operation of accurately confirming the state of the gaming machine and confirming the state of the gaming machine may occur. It can prevent.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the characteristic part 74AK is executed, thereby accepting confirmation The period starts. During this confirmation reception period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, when it is determined in step 75AKS 033 that the start operation has been detected without providing a confirmation acceptance period, control to execute the confirmation effect is performed. As a result, when the setting change state as the change permission condition is in, the confirmation effect can be executed any time. Therefore, in order to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect can be performed together with the change of the setting value. It can run properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characterizing portion 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed according to the setting change state. Thereafter, the confirmation reception control process similar to that of the characteristic part 74AK is executed, whereby the confirmation acceptance period is started. In this way, since the control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period is performed after the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, trouble occurs in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine In the case of preventing the problem, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

   The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS 033, whereby the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Further, by performing the same confirmation effect control processing as that of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. As a result, in the case of preventing any trouble in the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect can be appropriately performed.

(Description of means related to the feature portion 75AK)
Conventionally, as the above-mentioned characteristic part 75AK, as a game machine which can be changed to a plurality of settings with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, there is one described in, for example, JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2016-220833 A, consideration is not given to the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation are in competition. Therefore, there is a possibility that trouble may occur in the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature portion 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing trouble in the confirmation operation of the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different based on the set value set,
Setting control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to the change permission state that permits the change of the setting value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means capable of executing effects (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.);
Confirmation control means (for example, confirmation effect control processing of step 74AKS018, change of setting of step 75AKS008 during confirmation effect control) capable of executing control of confirmation effect by the effect means after power supply is started. And an effect control CPU 120) that executes processing
The confirmation control means
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period when the change permission state is not controlled with the start of the power supply (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc. ),
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition when in the change permission state (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008, etc.)
It may be a game machine characterized by.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be performed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine properly and confirming the state of the gaming machine. .

As a game machine of the means 2 which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033 , 74AKS036, etc.),
Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation acceptance period when in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 75AKS 033).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the characterizing portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with the change of the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period after the change permission state ends (for example, steps after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 Such as running 74 AKS 018),
The gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characterizing portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

As a game machine of the means 4 which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK,
The game detection means (for example, the push button 31B, the push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the action by the player is provided.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033),
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 according to the characteristic part 75AK characterized by the feature may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect.

(Description of means common to features 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of means A related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detection means (for example, a lock switch 51 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
An initialization detection unit (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of the gaming machine;
A setting confirmation control unit capable of controlling the setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection unit with the start of the power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002);
And a change permission control unit capable of controlling the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection unit with the start of the power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13).
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting values by appropriately controlling the setting confirmation state and the change permission state.

As a game machine of the means B which concerns on the characteristic parts 71AK-75AK,
Setting detection means (for example, a lock switch 51 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
An initialization detection unit (eg, clear switch AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When the operation is not detected by the setting detection unit with the start of the power supply and the operation is detected by the initialization detection unit, the initialization notification is performed with the start of the power supply, while the start of the power supply is started. Initialization notification unit that executes initialization notification after the operation is not detected when the operation is detected by the setting detection unit along with (for effect control for executing the command processing at power on in step AKS012, for example) And the like)
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the initialization notification can be appropriately performed to enable the appropriate setting of the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means C pertaining to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK,
The information display means (for example, display monitor 29 etc.) which can display the information regarding the game value provided based on game media entering into a predetermined field,
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A, etc.)
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, appropriate setting of setting values is possible without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting values.

As a game machine of the means D which concerns on the characteristic parts 71AK-75AK,
Detection means for effect (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001 etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of effect;
The display control means (for example, CPU 120 for presentation control etc which performs step AKS026 etc.) which displays the display about the setting value by the above-mentioned setting means with priority over the display about the output amount of a production,
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the problem of changing the set value.

As a game machine of the means E which concerns on the characteristic parts 71AK-75AK,
Effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control which executes command analysis processing of AKS 015 etc.) which controls execution of effects based on information from the game control means, and
The effect control means, when in the change permitted state, restricts control based on information different from notification information for notifying the end of the change permitted state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executing AKS 027, etc. ) And
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be the gaming machine according to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, occurrence of a failure can be prevented, and appropriate setting of setting values can be performed.

(Description related to relating feature parts)
Each configuration related to the features 71AK to 75AK, 98AK, and 99AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features. The features combined in this way or the individual features not combined may be combined with part or all of the configurations related to other features as appropriate. For example, with regard to the feature part 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes start output switching processing in step 71AKS013 of the production control main processing, and regarding the feature part 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the command processing at power on. With regard to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs control to be executed, for effect control that does not perform control to execute the short initial operation until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing that the setting change is finished. With regard to the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic part 74AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main processing, and regarding the characteristic part 75AK, in step 75AKS008 of command processing at power on. With regard to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process during constant change, the feature portion 98AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that sets the air volume corresponding to the volume in the process of step 98AKS003, and the step 99AKS003 with the feature portion 99AK The configuration for executing different determinations in steps 99AKS013 and 99AKS015 may be a combination of part or all of them as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 51 ... lock switch 100 ... microcomputer 120 for game control ... CPU for effect control
AK001 ... clear switch 71AK001 ... output amount changeover switch 72AKP01 ... short initial control pattern 72AKP02 ... long initial control pattern 74AKP01 ... effect control pattern 98AK001 ... first air outlet 98AK002 ... second air outlet 99AK001 ... first movable body 99AK002 ... second movable body

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A first effect movable body provided so as to allow a player to make contact;
A second effect movable body provided so as to allow a player to make contact;
An operation control unit configured to control an operation of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body;
The operation control means is
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the first effect movable body,
It is possible to execute control to stop the operation during the operation of the second effect movable body,
A game machine characterized by stopping the operation under different conditions for the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body.

Images